unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生用）(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)

篇1：unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生用）(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)

Listening

I. Some important words in the listening:

1) survey questionnaire comments observation majority protest motive

2) percentage frequency chart

II. pre-question: How do you spend your time after school?

III. listening

Ex.1. listen to the tape and ask them to decide T or F

a. The survey was conducted among 400 foreign university students. ( )

b. The questionnaire has only one section. ( )

c. 81% of the students complained about the homework and 44% said they

had part-time jobs. ( )

d. The second part or the questionnaire was filled out by student who had a

part-time job. ( )

e. The number of the students looking for jobs is decreasing. ( )

Ex. 2 The listening is a summary of research into the ways Chinese

students in Auckland spend their leisure time. Listen to the tape and fill

in the most important percentage mentioned in the text in the chart.

Frequency Doing homework Going to the cinema Going shopping Doing nothing at all

None

Hardly

Little

Sometimes

Much

Most

All

Ex.3 Listen to the para4 and draw a pie chart of the things working students

spend their money on.

Look at the textbook and finish the chart on your books (P 92 ,Ex.3)

Ex. 4 Fill in the blanks with the missing words.

The second part of the questionnaire was only _____ ____ by students who had a part-time job. Most of them (____) said that it had been easy to find a job, with 60% _______this was their first job. 81% said that their parents _____ _________, but ____ ____on the condition that their school results would not ________. All students said that the greatest advantage of having a part-time job _____ ___having more money, though 23% of the students said working with and _____ ____ _____other people was something they enjoyed. ______ what they use the money for, students mentioned various free-time __________, as described in part one of the survey. ____all other things they spend their ______on, the most important were phone calls (40%), _______ closely by clothes and _______ (35%) and going out (15%). Only 10% of the students said they ______ ____ money in a savings account.

The results of the _______ seem to suggest that Chinese students abroad have little time for part-time jobs. They spend most of their free time _______ homework. However, an ________ number of students look for jobs. They seem to enjoy it, and are able to ________ it with their school work. While the ________ of the students said the ________ motive to look for a job was _______, about one fifth of the students enjoyed _________ and getting to know people in a different _________, away from school.

Reading : Making the team work

I. Match the main idea with each part

Part1 (para1-2) *Working in groups at school is an opportunity to learn

about teamwork.

Part2 (para3-4) *How to make teams function well.

Part3 (para5) *What is a team.

Part4 ( para6) *How can group work be successful

Part5 (para7) *Different members in the teams can occupy different

jobs.

Part6 (para8-10) *sports team

II. Fast-reading questions:

1. What is a team?

2. What is the function of group work?

3 According to the author, what are requirements for teams to function well?

4. How are the tasks of the group divided?

5. How can we make the best of working with our classmates?

III. careful- reading

A. True or False

1. In a sports team, the coach must be a member of the team. ( )

2. In sports teams, group work can be successful when members respect, help and support each other. ( )

3. Sports teams require leaders, people to create ideas, people to develop ideas, people to do practical work, people to comment on and improve ideas, people to identify and solve problems, and people to suggest solutions. ( )

4. Only rules and regulations can help teams function well. ( )

5. Only people with the same personality work well together. ( )

6. The author thinks the statement that some team members work best in tasks alone is contradictory. ( )

B. Choose the best answers:

1. In sports games , a player _______ .

A. often changes his role

B. has a clear role

C. feels that players with different abilities make different contributions to the team

D. accepts the same expectations and responsibilities as the other players

2. The author takes _____ for example to show how a team can work well

A. the sports team

B. the project team

C. the rugby team

D. a dynamic team

3.In order for a team to function well , people of the team must ______ .

A. respect each other

B. co-operate

C. obey necessary rules and regulations

D. all the above

4.Group work at school is important to students because _______ .

A. it is an opportunity to learn more about team work

B. it brings the benefit of getting experience working with others

C. it teaches us to be patient and how to respond to different personalities

D. it is a preparation for our working days to come

5.Why it is important in a team to know someone’s personality type and ability ?

A. We can know a great deal about that person

B. Lack of recognition of differences in human function can be avoided

C. We can build strong and good relationships between members of a team

D. Both B and C

6.What is the main idea of Paragraph 7 ?

A. How a project team is different from a rugby team

B. How a project team works

C. In a project team , people who have different abilities and personalities have different roles in the team

D. How the tasks of the group are divided depends on personalities and abilities of the individuals in the group

7. In the whole text , the author mainly talks about _______ .

A. the elements that make the team work

B. the importance of social relationships within a team

C. the roles that different people of a group play

D. the comparison between a project team and a rugby team

8.According to the text , which of the following statements is not right ?

A. The coach of a sports team is not counted as a team member , so he is less important

B. Social relations are important within the team

C. The atmosphere in the group affects the performance of the team

D. It’s not necessary for all team members to be friends

9. We can infer from the test that ______ .

A. the players in a rugby team should co-operate while the people in a project team needn’t

B. the players in a rugby team have clear roles while people in a project team may not have

C. the coach of a rugby team discusses strategy and makes decisions while the leader of a project team doesn’t

D. the coach of a rugby team is important while the leader in a project team may not be as important

C. further understanding

1) Try to compare the rugby team with the project team

Similarities 1. They are both____________.

2. All team members should __________________________

3. The tasks of the teams should _____________________

_____________________________________________.

Differences

Project team Rugby team

1 1

2 2

3 3

IV. Phrases:

Para1:

1. _________________________ 为了…，由于,看在…的份上

2. _________________________ 实际上

prar2:

3. _________________________ 组合，集合

para3:

4. _________________________ 共同目标

5. _________________________ 被算作…

6. _________________________ 社会关系

7. _________________________ 做出同等贡献

para4:

8. _________________________ 对…没有异议

9. _____________ 附属于；将某物系在另一物上；将某物与另一物相联系

10. _________________________ 意识到；

para5:

11. _________________________ 对…最适合

12. _________________________ 带来好处

13. _________________________ 适合..的目的

14. _________________________ 应对不同个性的人

para6:

15. _________________________ 就…而言，至于…

16. _________________________ 分工

17. _________________________ 发挥正常水平

18. _________________________ 项目小组

19. _________________________ 身兼数职

20. _________________________ 给…带来新鲜活力

21. _________________________ 监管，照看；

22. _________________________ 在矛盾中协调

23. _________________________ 保持平静和谐

para8:

24. _________________________ 防止

25. _________________________ 对…加以考虑, 顾及

para9:

26. _________________________ 为了做…到最好；

27. _________________________ 强弱项，优缺点；

para10:

28. _________________________ 对…认识的缺乏；

29. _________________________ 人体机能

Integrating skills reading: Ticket to Success

I. Warming -up question:

What do you want to do after you graduate from high school?

Most of us are studying here aimed at going to universities. Is it the only way to succeed?

II. Fast reading

Li yonghong made two important decisions in her life. What are they?

1). __________________________________________________.

2). __________________________________________________.

III. careful reading

1. Read the text quickly and explain what the text is about?

2. The author distinguished two personality types .What are they?

3. In order to become successful, what must we do? ( Para. 4、5、6)

1). __________________________________________________

2). __________________________________________________

3). __________________________________________________

4. What are the different learning styles:( Para. 7)

1). __________________________________________________

2). __________________________________________________

IV. Phrases:

1. _________________________ 在想…,计划…

_________________________ 记住,记…在心里

_________________________ 把…挂在心上

2. congratulate sb. on/upon (doing) sth _______________________

congratulate sb. on one’s marriage/ new job/ good exam results

congratulate oneself on/upon (doing) sth认为自己幸运或成功

3. _________________________ 管理财务

4. put…to good use _________________________

5. _________________________ 化妆

6. _________________________ 倾向于

7. live up to _________________________

eg: fail to live up to his parents’ expectations

8. _________________________ 了解自己

9. _________________________ 跟着感觉走

follow your own interest _________________________

10. _________________________ 充分利用….

11. _________________________ 亲身实践的，实习的

12. _________________________ 适应，迁就，迎合

13. _________________________ 以独特的方式

14. _________________________ 内部作用

篇2：unit 11 全单元课件word版（教师用）(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)

Listening

I. Some important words in the listening:

1) survey questionnaire comments observation majority protest motive

2) percentage frequency chart

II. pre-question: How do you spend your time after school?

III. listening

Ex.1. listen to the tape and ask them to decide T or F

a. The survey was conducted among 400 foreign university students. ( T )

b. The questionnaire has only one section. (F) para2

c. 81% of the students complained about the homework and 44% said they

had part-time jobs. (F) para3

d. The second part or the questionnaire was filled out by student who had a

part-time job. (T) para4

e. The number of the students looking for jobs is decreasing. (F) para5

Ex. 2 The listening is a summary of research into the ways Chinese

students in Auckland spend their leisure time. Listen to the tape and fill

in the most important percentage mentioned in the text in the chart.

the answers are in the para3.

While listening, students must keep figures(percentage) and the frequency(how much time is devoted to various activities)

Frequency Doing homework Going to the cinema Going shopping Doing nothing at all

None

Hardly

Little

Sometimes 69% 75% 56%

Much

Most 62%

All 25% (1/4)

Ex.3 Listen to the para4 and draw a pie chart of the things working students

spend their money on. (On the textbook, P 92 ,Ex.3)

the answer is in the para 4

Ex. 4 Fill in the blanks with the missing words.

The second part of the questionnaire was only filled out by students who had a part-time job. Most of them (94%) said that it had been easy to find a job, with 60% saying this was their first job. 81% said that their parents had protested, but given in on the condition that their school results would not suffer. All students said that the greatest advantage of having a part-time job lay in having more money, though 23% of the students said working with and getting to know other people was something they enjoyed. Asked what they use the money for, students mentioned various free-time occupations, as described in part one of the survey. Of all other things they spend their wages on, the most important were phone calls(40%), followed closely by clothes and makeup (35%) and going out (15%). Only 10% of the students said they put away money in a savings account.

The results of the survey seem to suggest that Chinese students abroad have little time for part-time jobs. They spend most of their free time doing homework. However, an increasing number of students look for jobs. They seem to enjoy it, and are able to combine it with their school work. While the majority of the students said the main motive to look for a job was money, about one fifth of the students enjoyed contacts and getting to know people in a different setting, away from school.

Reading : Making the team work

I. Match the main idea with each part

Part1 (para1-2) a. What is a team.

Part2 (para3-4) b. sports team

Part3 (para5) c. Working in groups at school is an opportunity to learn about teamwork.

Part4 ( para6) d. How can group work be successful

Part5 (para7) e. Different members in the teams can occupy different jobs.

Part6 (para8-10) f. How to make teams function well.

II. Fast-reading questions:

1. What is a team?

A team is a group of individual people brought together in order to accomplish a task that cannot be efficiently of effectively completed by an member of the group alone. ( Para. 2)

2. What is the function of group work?

Group work makes us aware of the role that is most suitable for each of us, bring the benefit of getting experience working with other people, show us how other people’s roles fit the purpose of the group and teaches us to be patient and how to respect to different personalities. (para5)

3 According to the author, what are requirements for teams to function well?

All team members should respect each other, have clear roles, support and help each other. (para6)

4. How are the tasks of the group divided?

The tasks of the group are divided depending on the personalities and abilities of the individuals in the group. (para8)

5. How can we make the best of working with our classmates?

We should recognise their strengths and weaknesses. Their differences are the strength of the team. Knowing other people’s shortcomings can help us avoid embarrassing them. (para9)

III. careful- reading

A. True or False

1. In a sports team, the coach must be a member of the team. (F) para3

2. In sports teams, group work can be successful when members respect, help and support each other. (T) para6

4. Only rules and regulations can help teams function well. (F) para8

5. Only people with the same personality work well together. (F) para9

6. The author thinks the statement that some team members work best in tasks alone is contradictory. (F)

B. Choose the best answers:

1. In sports games , a player _______ . B

A. often changes his role

B. has a clear role

C. feels that players with different abilities make different contributions to the team

D. accepts the same expectations and responsibilities as the other players

2. The author takes _____ for example to show how a team can work well A

A. the sports team

B. the project team

C. the rugby team

D. a dynamic team

3.In order for a team to function well , people of the team must ______ . D

A. respect each other

B. co-operate

C. obey necessary rules and regulations

D. all the above

4.Group work at school is important to students because _______ . D

A. it is an opportunity to learn more about team work

B. it brings the benefit of getting experience working with others

C. it teaches us to be patient and how to respond to different personalities

D. it is a preparation for our working days to come

5.Why it is important in a team to know someone’s personality type and ability ? D

A. We can know a great deal about that person

B. Lack of recognition of differences in human function can be avoided

C. We can build strong and good relationships between members of a team

D. Both B and C

6.What is the main idea of Paragraph 7 ? C

A. How a project team is different from a rugby team

B. How a project team works

C. In a project team , people who have different abilities and personalities have different roles in the team

D. How the tasks of the group are divided depends on personalities and abilities of the individuals in the group

7. In the whole text , the author mainly talks about _______ . A

A. the elements that make the team work

B. the importance of social relationships within a team

C. the roles that different people of a group play

D. the comparison between a project team and a rugby team

8.According to the text , which of the following statements is not right ? A

A. The coach of a sports team is not counted as a team member , so he is less important

B. Social relations are important within the team

C. The atmosphere in the group affects the performance of the team

D. It’s not necessary for all team members to be friends

9. We can infer from the test that ______ . B

A. the players in a rugby team should co-operate while the people in a project team needn’t

B. the players in a rugby team have clear roles while people in a project team may not have

C. the coach of a rugby team discusses strategy and makes decisions while the leader of a project team doesn’t

D. the coach of a rugby team is important while the leader in a project team may not be as important

C. further understanding

1) Try to compare the rugby team with the project team

Similarities 1. They are both teamwork.

2. All team members should respect, help and support each other.

3. The tasks of the teams should be divided according to the personalities and abilities of the team members.

Differences

Project team Rugby team

1. Team members may combine roles. 1. the work division is clear and each player has a clear role.

2. The number of players is changeable. 2. The number of players is not changeable.

3. The purpose is to build buildings. 3. The purpose is to win a match.

IV. Phrases:

1. for the sake of.. =for one’s sake 为了…，由于,看在…的份上

2. in reality 实际上

prar2:

3. bring together 组合，集合

para3:

4. common goal 共同目标

5. be counted as… 被算作…

6. social relation 社会关系

7. make an equal contribution 做出同等贡献

para4:

8. there are no conflicts about… 对…没有异议

9. be attached to 附属于；将某物系在另一物上；将某物与另一物相联系

10. be aware of… 意识到；

para5:

11. be most suitable for… 对…最适合

12. bring the benefit 带来好处

13. fit the purpose of… 适合..的目的

14. respond to different personalities 应对不同个性的人

para6:

15. as with=as to =as for 就…而言，至于…

16. the work division 分工

17. perform at the right level 发挥正常水平

18. a project team 项目小组

19. combine roles 身兼数职

20. bring new energy to… 给…带来新鲜活力

21. keep an eye on… 监管，照看；

22. compromise in conflicts 在矛盾中协调

23. keep peace and harmony 保持平静和谐

para8:

24. guard against… 防止

25. take into account= take into consideration= take account of

对…加以考虑, 顾及

para9:

26. to make the best of doing… 为了做…到最好；

27. strengths and weakness 强弱项，优缺点；

para10:

28. the lack of recognition of.. 对…认识的缺乏；

29. human functioning 人体机能

Integrating skills reading: Ticket to Success

I. Warming -up question:

What do you want to do after you graduate from high school?

Most of us are studying here aimed at going to universities. Is it the only way to succeed?

II. Fast reading

Li yonghong made two important decisions in her life. What are they? (Para.1、2)

1). Left school and took a one-year training course to become a hairdresser.

2). Learnt how to do make-up.

III. careful reading

1. Read the text quickly and explain what the text is about?

The text is about choices in life and careers. It suggests that different people have different talent, and that in order to be successful ,society and people have to make the best of their talent.

2. The author distinguished two personality types .What are they?

Mental intellectual type and hands-on experiences type

3. In order to become successful, what must we do? ( Para. 4、5、6)

1). explore your talents and get to know yourself so as to find out where your real interests lie.

2). follow what feels right.

3). we must make the most of our special talents and interests.

4. What are the different learning styles:( Para. 7)

1). schools and universities

2). to try, experiment and find their way through hands-on experience

IV. Phrases:

1. have sb./sth.in mind 在想…,计划…

bear/keep sb./sth. In mind记住,记…在心里

have…on one’s mind 把…挂在心上

2. congratulate sb. on/upon (doing) sth

congratulate sb. on one’s marriage/ new job/ good exam results

congratulate oneself on/upon (doing) sth认为自己幸运或成功

3. manage the finances 管理财务

4. put…to good use

5. do make-up 化妆

6. tend to 倾向于

7. live up to 依照某事物行事,表现出符号某事物的标准

eg: fail to live up to his parents’ expectations

8. get to know oneself 了解自己

9. follow what feels right 跟着感觉走

follow your own interest

10. make the most of….

11．.hands-on: practical亲身实践的，实习的

12. accommodate sth to sth 适应，迁就，迎合

13. in unique way 以独特的方式

14． inner processes 内部作用

篇3：人教版高三unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生教师用）

Unit 11 Key to success

Listening

I. Some important words in the listening:

1) survey questionnaire comments observation majority protest motive

2) percentage frequency chart

II. pre-question: How do you spend your time after school?

III. listening

Ex.1. listen to the tape and ask them to decide T or F

a. The survey was conducted among 400 foreign university students. ( )

b. The questionnaire has only one section. ( )

c. 81% of the students complained about the homework and 44% said they

had part-time jobs. ( )

d. The second part or the questionnaire was filled out by student who had a

part-time job. ( )

e. The number of the students looking for jobs is decreasing. ( )

Ex. 2 The listening is a summary of research into the ways Chinese

students in Auckland spend their leisure time. Listen to the tape and fill

in the most important percentage mentioned in the text in the chart.

Frequency Doing homework Going to the cinema Going shopping Doing nothing at all

None

Hardly

Little

Sometimes

Much

Most

All

Ex.3 Listen to the para4 and draw a pie chart of the things working students

spend their money on.

Look at the textbook and finish the chart on your books (P 92 ,Ex.3)

Ex. 4 Fill in the blanks with the missing words.

Reading : Making the team work

I. Match the main idea with each part

Part1 (para1-2) *Working in groups at school is an opportunity to learn

about teamwork.

Part2 (para3-4) *How to make teams function well.

Part3 (para5) *What is a team.

Part4 ( para6) *How can group work be successful

Part5 (para7) *Different members in the teams can occupy different

jobs.

Part6 (para8-10) *sports team

II. Fast-reading questions:

1. What is a team?

2. What is the function of group work?

3 According to the author, what are requirements for teams to function well?

4. How are the tasks of the group divided?

5. How can we make the best of working with our classmates?

III. careful- reading

A. True or False

1. In a sports team, the coach must be a member of the team. ( )

2. In sports teams, group work can be successful when members respect, help and support each other. ( )

4. Only rules and regulations can help teams function well. ( )

5. Only people with the same personality work well together. ( )

6. The author thinks the statement that some team members work best in tasks alone is contradictory. ( )

B. Choose the best answers:

1. In sports games , a player _______ .

A. often changes his role

B. has a clear role

C. feels that players with different abilities make different contributions to the team

D. accepts the same expectations and responsibilities as the other players

2. The author takes _____ for example to show how a team can work well

A. the sports team

B. the project team

C. the rugby team

D. a dynamic team

3.In order for a team to function well , people of the team must ______ .

A. respect each other

B. co-operate

C. obey necessary rules and regulations

D. all the above

4.Group work at school is important to students because _______ .

A. it is an opportunity to learn more about team work

B. it brings the benefit of getting experience working with others

C. it teaches us to be patient and how to respond to different personalities

D. it is a preparation for our working days to come

5.Why it is important in a team to know someone’s personality type and ability ?

A. We can know a great deal about that person

B. Lack of recognition of differences in human function can be avoided

C. We can build strong and good relationships between members of a team

D. Both B and C

6.What is the main idea of Paragraph 7 ?

A. How a project team is different from a rugby team

B. How a project team works

C. In a project team , people who have different abilities and personalities have different roles in the team

D. How the tasks of the group are divided depends on personalities and abilities of the individuals in the group

7. In the whole text , the author mainly talks about _______ .

A. the elements that make the team work

B. the importance of social relationships within a team

C. the roles that different people of a group play

D. the comparison between a project team and a rugby team

8.According to the text , which of the following statements is not right ?

A. The coach of a sports team is not counted as a team member , so he is less important

B. Social relations are important within the team

C. The atmosphere in the group affects the performance of the team

D. It’s not necessary for all team members to be friends

9. We can infer from the test that ______ .

A. the players in a rugby team should co-operate while the people in a project team needn’t

B. the players in a rugby team have clear roles while people in a project team may not have

C. the coach of a rugby team discusses strategy and makes decisions while the leader of a project team doesn’t

D. the coach of a rugby team is important while the leader in a project team may not be as important

C. further understanding

1) Try to compare the rugby team with the project team

Similarities 1. They are both____________.

2. All team members should __________________________

3. The tasks of the teams should _____________________

_____________________________________________.

Differences

Project team Rugby team

1 1

2 2

3 3

IV. Phrases:

Para1:

1. _________________________ 为了…，由于,看在…的份上

2. _________________________ 实际上

prar2:

3. _________________________ 组合，集合

para3:

4. _________________________ 共同目标

5. _________________________ 被算作…

6. _________________________ 社会关系

7. _________________________ 做出同等贡献

para4:

8. _________________________ 对…没有异议

9. _____________ 附属于；将某物系在另一物上；将某物与另一物相联系

10. _________________________ 意识到；

para5:

11. _________________________ 对…最适合

12. _________________________ 带来好处

13. _________________________ 适合..的目的

14. _________________________ 应对不同个性的人

para6:

15. _________________________ 就…而言，至于…

16. _________________________ 分工

17. _________________________ 发挥正常水平

18. _________________________ 项目小组

19. _________________________ 身兼数职

20. _________________________ 给…带来新鲜活力

21. _________________________ 监管，照看；

22. _________________________ 在矛盾中协调

23. _________________________ 保持平静和谐

para8:

24. _________________________ 防止

25. _________________________ 对…加以考虑, 顾及

para9:

26. _________________________ 为了做…到最好；

27. _________________________ 强弱项，优缺点；

para10:

28. _________________________ 对…认识的缺乏；

29. _________________________ 人体机能

Integrating skills reading: Ticket to Success

I. Warming -up question:

What do you want to do after you graduate from high school?

Most of us are studying here aimed at going to universities. Is it the only way to succeed?

II. Fast reading

Li yonghong made two important decisions in her life. What are they?

1). __________________________________________________.

2). __________________________________________________.

III. careful reading

1. Read the text quickly and explain what the text is about?

2. The author distinguished two personality types .What are they?

3. In order to become successful, what must we do? ( Para. 4、5、6)

1). __________________________________________________

2). __________________________________________________

3). __________________________________________________

4. What are the different learning styles:( Para. 7)

1). __________________________________________________

2). __________________________________________________

IV. Phrases:

_________________________ 在想…,计划…

_________________________ 记住,记…在心里

_________________________ 把…挂在心上

2. congratulate sb. on/upon (doing) sth _______________________

congratulate sb. on one’s marriage/ new job/ good exam results

congratulate oneself on/upon (doing) sth认为自己幸运或成功

3. _________________________ 管理财务

4. put…to good use _________________________

5. _________________________ 化妆

6. _________________________ 倾向于

7. live up to _________________________

eg: fail to live up to his parents’ expectations

8. _________________________ 了解自己

9. _________________________ 跟着感觉走

follow your own interest _________________________

10. _________________________ 充分利用….

11. _________________________ 亲身实践的，实习的

12. _________________________ 适应，迁就，迎合

13. _________________________ 以独特的方式

14. _________________________ 内部作用

Unit 11 Key to success

Listening

I. Some important words in the listening:

1) survey questionnaire comments observation majority protest motive

2) percentage frequency chart

II. pre-question: How do you spend your time after school?

III. listening

Ex.1. listen to the tape and ask them to decide T or F

a. The survey was conducted among 400 foreign university students. ( T )

b. The questionnaire has only one section. (F) para2

c. 81% of the students complained about the homework and 44% said they

had part-time jobs. (F) para3

d. The second part or the questionnaire was filled out by student who had a

part-time job. (T) para4

e. The number of the students looking for jobs is decreasing. (F) para5

Ex. 2 The listening is a summary of research into the ways Chinese

students in Auckland spend their leisure time. Listen to the tape and fill

in the most important percentage mentioned in the text in the chart.

the answers are in the para3.

While listening, students must keep figures(percentage) and the frequency(how much time is devoted to various activities)

Frequency Doing homework Going to the cinema Going shopping Doing nothing at all

None

Hardly

Little

Sometimes 69% 75% 56%

Much

Most 62%

All 25% (1/4)

Ex.3 Listen to the para4 and draw a pie chart of the things working students

spend their money on. (On the textbook, P 92 ,Ex.3)

the answer is in the para 4

Ex. 4 Fill in the blanks with the missing words.

Reading : Making the team work

I. Match the main idea with each part

Part1 (para1-2) a. What is a team.

Part2 (para3-4) b. sports team

Part3 (para5) c. Working in groups at school is an opportunity to learn about teamwork.

Part4 ( para6) d. How can group work be successful

Part5 (para7) e. Different members in the teams can occupy different jobs.

Part6 (para8-10) f. How to make teams function well.

II. Fast-reading questions:

1. What is a team?

A team is a group of individual people brought together in order to accomplish a task that cannot be efficiently of effectively completed by an member of the group alone. ( Para. 2)

2. What is the function of group work?

3 According to the author, what are requirements for teams to function well?

All team members should respect each other, have clear roles, support and help each other. (para6)

4. How are the tasks of the group divided?

The tasks of the group are divided depending on the personalities and abilities of the individuals in the group. (para8)

5. How can we make the best of working with our classmates?

We should recognise their strengths and weaknesses. Their differences are the strength of the team. Knowing other people’s shortcomings can help us avoid embarrassing them. (para9)

III. careful- reading

A. True or False

1. In a sports team, the coach must be a member of the team. (F) para3

2. In sports teams, group work can be successful when members respect, help and support each other. (T) para6

4. Only rules and regulations can help teams function well. (F) para8

5. Only people with the same personality work well together. (F) para9

6. The author thinks the statement that some team members work best in tasks alone is contradictory. (F)

B. Choose the best answers:

1. In sports games , a player _______ . B

A. often changes his role

B. has a clear role

C. feels that players with different abilities make different contributions to the team

D. accepts the same expectations and responsibilities as the other players

2. The author takes _____ for example to show how a team can work well A

A. the sports team

B. the project team

C. the rugby team

D. a dynamic team

3.In order for a team to function well , people of the team must ______ . D

A. respect each other

B. co-operate

C. obey necessary rules and regulations

D. all the above

4.Group work at school is important to students because _______ . D

A. it is an opportunity to learn more about team work

B. it brings the benefit of getting experience working with others

C. it teaches us to be patient and how to respond to different personalities

D. it is a preparation for our working days to come

5.Why it is important in a team to know someone’s personality type and ability ? D

A. We can know a great deal about that person

B. Lack of recognition of differences in human function can be avoided

C. We can build strong and good relationships between members of a team

D. Both B and C

6.What is the main idea of Paragraph 7 ? C

A. How a project team is different from a rugby team

B. How a project team works

C. In a project team , people who have different abilities and personalities have different roles in the team

D. How the tasks of the group are divided depends on personalities and abilities of the individuals in the group

7. In the whole text , the author mainly talks about _______ . A

A. the elements that make the team work

B. the importance of social relationships within a team

C. the roles that different people of a group play

D. the comparison between a project team and a rugby team

8.According to the text , which of the following statements is not right ? A

A. The coach of a sports team is not counted as a team member , so he is less important

B. Social relations are important within the team

C. The atmosphere in the group affects the performance of the team

D. It’s not necessary for all team members to be friends

9. We can infer from the test that ______ . B

A. the players in a rugby team should co-operate while the people in a project team needn’t

B. the players in a rugby team have clear roles while people in a project team may not have

C. the coach of a rugby team discusses strategy and makes decisions while the leader of a project team doesn’t

D. the coach of a rugby team is important while the leader in a project team may not be as important

C. further understanding

1) Try to compare the rugby team with the project team

Similarities 1. They are both teamwork.

2. All team members should respect, help and support each other.

3. The tasks of the teams should be divided according to the personalities and abilities of the team members.

Differences

Project team Rugby team

1. Team members may combine roles. 1. the work division is clear and each player has a clear role.

2. The number of players is changeable. 2. The number of players is not changeable.

3. The purpose is to build buildings. 3. The purpose is to win a match.

IV. Phrases:

1. for the sake of.. =for one’s sake 为了…，由于,看在…的份上

2. in reality 实际上

prar2:

3. bring together 组合，集合

para3:

4. common goal 共同目标

5. be counted as… 被算作…

6. social relation 社会关系

7. make an equal contribution 做出同等贡献

para4:

8. there are no conflicts about… 对…没有异议

9. be attached to 附属于；将某物系在另一物上；将某物与另一物相联系

10. be aware of… 意识到；

para5:

11. be most suitable for… 对…最适合

12. bring the benefit 带来好处

13. fit the purpose of… 适合..的目的

14. respond to different personalities 应对不同个性的人

para6:

15. as with=as to =as for 就…而言，至于…

16. the work division 分工

17. perform at the right level 发挥正常水平

18. a project team 项目小组

19. combine roles 身兼数职

20. bring new energy to… 给…带来新鲜活力

21. keep an eye on… 监管，照看；

22. compromise in conflicts 在矛盾中协调

23. keep peace and harmony 保持平静和谐

para8:

24. guard against… 防止

25. take into account= take into consideration= take account of

对…加以考虑, 顾及

para9:

26. to make the best of doing… 为了做…到最好；

27. strengths and weakness 强弱项，优缺点；

para10:

28. the lack of recognition of.. 对…认识的缺乏；

29. human functioning 人体机能

Integrating skills reading: Ticket to Success

I. Warming -up question:

What do you want to do after you graduate from high school?

Most of us are studying here aimed at going to universities. Is it the only way to succeed?

II. Fast reading

Li yonghong made two important decisions in her life. What are they? (Para.1、2)

1). Left school and took a one-year training course to become a hairdresser.

2). Learnt how to do make-up.

III. careful reading

1. Read the text quickly and explain what the text is about?

The text is about choices in life and careers. It suggests that different people have different talent, and that in order to be successful ,society and people have to make the best of their talent.

2. The author distinguished two personality types .What are they?

Mental intellectual type and hands-on experiences type

3. In order to become successful, what must we do? ( Para. 4、5、6)

1). explore your talents and get to know yourself so as to find out where your real interests lie.

2). follow what feels right.

3). we must make the most of our special talents and interests.

4. What are the different learning styles:( Para. 7)

1). schools and universities

2). to try, experiment and find their way through hands-on experience

IV. Phrases:

have sb./sth.in mind 在想…,计划…

bear/keep sb./sth. In mind记住,记…在心里

have…on one’s mind 把…挂在心上

2. congratulate sb. on/upon (doing) sth

congratulate sb. on one’s marriage/ new job/ good exam results

congratulate oneself on/upon (doing) sth认为自己幸运或成功

3. manage the finances 管理财务

4. put…to good use

5. do make-up 化妆

6. tend to 倾向于

7. live up to 依照某事物行事,表现出符号某事物的标准

eg: fail to live up to his parents’ expectations

8. get to know oneself 了解自己

9. follow what feels right 跟着感觉走

follow your own interest

10. make the most of….

11．.hands-on: practical亲身实践的，实习的

12. accommodate sth to sth 适应，迁就，迎合

13. in unique way 以独特的方式

14． inner processes 内部作用

篇4：Unit 20 全单元教案(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)

Period 1 Warming up & Listening

Type of lesson: warming up & Listening

Teaching aims：

1. Help the Ss talk about archaeological discoveries and describe the life of people in China during the periods of the Stone Age, the Bronze age, Han Dynasty and Tang Dynasty.

2. By listening to the material on Page 74, students can know what the tool looks like, what its use is and so on and by practice, students can master the ways to get the main idea of the passage and some important or useful details.

Teaching focus: Train Ss’ listening ability.

Teaching aids: tape recorder, worksheet & computer

*********************************************************************

Teaching Procedures:

I. Warming up

Step 1. Ask the students some questions and show them some pictures of archaeological discoveries. Introduce the words “archaeology, archaeologist.”

1) T: China is a country with an ancient civilization. It has a long history and brilliant culture. In which ways can we learn about its history and culture? (Archaeology)

2) What can archaeological discoveries bring us?

Step 2. Present some typical archeological discoveries and lead the Ss to talk about them.

1) T: Please look at the pictures and talk about them.

Questions for thinking:

----What are these important discoveries ?

----What period of time do they belong to?

Step 3. Help the Ss describe the life of people in China during the periods above.

1) T: What can they remind us of ?

Remind us of the history

1.What they ate

2.Where they lived

3.What their houses looked like

4.What kind of tools they used

5.What kind of entertainment they had

……2) Discuss and talk about the following items.

Stone Age Bronze Age Han Dynasty Tang Dynasty

Food

Housing

Home decoration

Tools

Artefacts

Entertainment

Step 4.Help the Ss get to know more important discoveries.

1) Match the time with the place where its relics are unearthed:

Stone Age Mawangdui

Han Dynasty the Banpo Ruins/ the Ruins of Hemudu

Bronze Age the Ruins of the Chang’An City

Tang Dynasty the Ruins of Yanshi Erlitou(1959, Henan)

2) Let the Ss enjoy the pictures and answer the questions.1. Where were they unearthed ?

2. Where can you go if we want to visit them?

II. Listening

Step 1. Pre-listening

1. Show students three pictures. And ask them in which period of time the people in the pictures lived. (Stone Age)

2. Show students some pictures of the tools used by the people in Stone Age. And ask them if they are asked to introduce one of these tools to other people, from which aspects they are going to describe them.

what it looks like

when it was found

where it was found

when it was used

usage

how to use it

…

Step 2 While-listening

1. First listening to get the main idea.

What are they talking about?

A. a short stick.

B. an ancient weapon to throw spears.

C. a little carved animal.

2. Second listening

Task: Listen and write down the questions asked by the students.

1) What ____________________________________________?

2) What ____________________________________________?

3) How ____________________________________________?

4) How ____________________________________________?

5) Where ___________________________________________?

3. Listen to the tape for the third time

Task: Get the answers to each of the questions.

Questions 1: What is it?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It looks like ____________ to me; about ___________.

2) At the top there’s a little ________________________.

3) At the bottom end there are __________ through the stick.

4) On the right there are __________of a young baby goat that is _________.

☆ Make a drawing of the tool.

Question 2: What was it used for?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It is an _____________. One of the __________________.

2) There were bears that ______________________________ and very large kind of _____________________________________________.

3) It was too dangerous to ______________________________ or even _____________.

Question 3: How did it work?

☆ Listen and finish the exercises.

1). How far can you throw a spear with our arm?

A. 15m B. 50m C. 45m

2). How far can you throw a spear with a tool like this?

A. 90m B. 300m C. 60m

3).By using this tool it could be thrown ___________________________________ and with _____________.There are three holes. One __________________________________, one __________________________, and ______________________was tied into the smallest one. A spear of about ________________ was laid on the stick, resting against the small piece of ____________ or leather. With a _________ on the string and a ________________ of the arm, the spear would be thrown.

Question 4:When and Where was it found?

☆ Listen and answer the questions

1) How old is it?

a) 1 to 2,000 years

b) 10 to 20,000 years

c) over 5000years

2) In how many places were this tool found?

Three.

3) How did people in South America and Australia know about this tool?

They invented it again.

Step 3 Post-listening

Task: Write a passage to introduce an ancient tool.

1) Show students a picture of different tools used by people in Bronze Age, and ask them to have a discussion about which one they are interested in.

2) According to the questions and answers in the listening material, students write a short passage to introduce one of the tools in the picture.

3) Present in class.

III. Homework

1) Revise their passage.

2) Preview the reading part of this unit.

Self-evaluation

Unit 20 Reading

Type of lesson: Reading

Teaching aims: Get the Ss to know about the King of Stonehenge

Improve the Ss’ reading ability

Important points: the Ss get a good understanding of the text

Difficult points: Ss’ reading ability get improved

Teaching aids: a tape recorder ,a computer and worksheets

Teaching procedures:

Step I. Pre-reading.（leading-in ）

1.Show some pictures about famous tombs in Chinese history

2.When we discover a tomb of a king in China, what can usually be found in it?

( clothing, knife, pottery, jewellery, tools etc. )(leading the Ss know more words about them.)

3.Why were these things buried with the dead king or emperor？

Key：A.To show off their power and wealth.

B. To protect these things.

C. Want the died people to use them after their death.

D. To be given to him for his use in the next life.

F. To show people’s respect to the death.

Step II. While -reading

A. Fast reading to get the main idea of each paragraph, and then divide it into parts

Part 1 (para. 1): The discovery of a grave.

Part 2 (para.2_to 3_): Objects found in the grave.

Part 3 (para. 4_-_5): The importance of the discovery.

Part 4 (para. 6_-7_): About Stonehenge and the King of Stonehenge.

B. Detailed reading:

1. Read the first three paragraphs to find out

1) Which objects were found in the grave of the King of Stonehenge?

Key: a pin, clothing, a coat, a knife, earrings, arrows and a bow tools, weapons, pottery & jewellery

2) Which materials were found?

Key: fur, stone, clay, pottery, copper, bone, and goldRead paragraph 4 & 5 to answer the following question:

1) What are the five reasons to show the importance of the discoveries ?

Key: a) His grave is the richest of any found from that period.

b) This was a time when the first metals were brought to Britain.

c) This man was buried with two gold earrings which are the oldest gold ever found in Britain.

d) He was buried three miles from Stonehenge at the time when the great stones were being brought to Salisbury to build it.

e) He is an example of people who brought culture and new techniques from the European mainland to Britain.

3. Read Part 6&7. do T or F exercises

1) The biggest stones came from a long distance away.

2) Archeologists know how early man was able to construct Stonehenge without the use of modern constructions and machines.

3). The King of Stonehenge was likely to be involved in planning and

helping build the monument.

4). The King of Stonehenge came from Central Europe.

5). At first people thought that it was through was and armed conflict not

through trade and cultural links that the skills to make copper and bronze objects spread to Britain.

( Check the answers: F F T T T)

C. Language points:

1. Buried with him were the tools of a hunter or warrior.

该句为倒装句, 表语置于句首时, 倒装结构为“表语+系动词+主语”。

e.g. Present at the meeting were Professor White, Professor Smith and many other guests.

2. Some of the objects found in the grave give us an idea of how he was dressed when he was buried.

found in the grave是过去分词作定语

give sb. an idea of 使某人明白

e.g. The book will give you an idea of what everyday life of ordinary

Americans is like.

3.That would have made him a man of distinction.

must/may/might+have done (肯定) 对过去事实的推理

e.g. He might have given your more help, they were busy. I can’t find my pen

anywhere. I must have lost it.

can +have done 表示对过去事实疑问和否定的推测

e.g. He can’t have finished the work so soon.

could + have done 意为“过去能够,而事实上却没有”,表示一种遗憾

e.g. He always works hard. He could have passed the exam.

should / ought to +have done 意为“过去应该…但没有…”,有责备对方的意思

e.g. You should have told me the news an hour ago.

shouldn’t / oughtn’t to +have done 意为“过去不应该…，却…”,意在责备对方

e.g. You shouldn’t have told him the news. He was nearly sad to death.

needn’t + have done 意为“过去本没有必要..…却……”

e.g. There was plenty of time, she needn’t have hurried.

might + have done 表示“过去本可以….却没有…”

e.g. They might have given you more help, though they were busy.

Step III. Post reading.

1. From things that were found in the grave, archeologists now believe that people in the Bronze Age in England had trade and cultural links with other parts in Europe. Give examples of such links and what was traded.

country or part of Europe material or object of trade

West Wales stones to build Stonehenge

Spain copper knife

France copper knife

Europe gold jewellery

2. For trade and cultural links as well as life in Britain and the construction of Stonehenge, people in the Bronze Age must have had knowledge about certain things and certain fields of science. Work in groups to talk about the inventions and kinds of science they must have had, based on the reading passage.

activity knowledge, science, inventions and tools needed

1. travel to Scotland roads, shoes, language

2.construction of Stonehenge hammers, ropes, sth. to transport heavy stones, architecture

3. hunting rope, string, bow, arrows, spear, sticks

4. trade with Europe money or goods to trade, boats, bags, maps, language

5. making copper knives fire, chemistry, physics, pots, hammers

Homework:

With the development of modern tourism, more and more culture relics were destroyed by human beings, read the passage below, and think about “what should we do to protect our cultural heritage.”

Saving Stonehenge Oct.22nd,

With almost a million people visiting the monument each year, Stonehenge has become surrounded by roads and parking lots.

Recently, a group archaeologists decided to to restore Stonehenge to its natural setting. One road will be removed, and another will be routed through an underground tunnel. Today’s parking lots will become open fields, and a new visitors’ center will be built four kilometers away.

Unit20. Word Study

Type of lesson: word study

Teaching Contents: spare, average, date, cover, dress, find

Teaching Aims：Help the students grasp the usages and meanings of the above

words or phrases.

Important points: use the above words or phrases correctly and freely

Teaching Procedures:

I. spare

A. Read the following sentences and point out the part of speech of “spare” and the meaning of the underlined part

1. The boy loves surfing the internet in his spare time. (在空闲的时间里)

2. You should carry a spare tire in the back of your car. .( 备用胎)

3. I can’t spare the time for a holiday at present. . (抽出，腾出)

4. Can you spare me just a few minutes? . ( 抽出，腾出 )

5. He doesn’t spare any effort on his studies. .( 不遗余力)

6. Spare the rod and spoil the child. （不打不成器)

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of “spare”

Spare : Adj. 1.空闲的；2.不用的，闲置的；3.备用的，外加的；

Verb, 1.抽出，拨出，留出；2.不吝惜（时间，金钱）

C. complete the following sentences.

1.What do you usually do _____________________( 在你空余时间)？( in your spare time)

2.You’re driving to Tibet? It’s a long way. Be sure to ________________________ ( 带个备用胎) (bring a spare tire)

3.We can ________________________(给你腾出一间房)（spare one room for you ）

4. He _____________(想尽各种办法)to make her happy.(spares no effort)

II. average

A. present the following sentences.

1. The average of 4, 5 and 9 is 6.平均数

2. Tom’s work at school is above average, while Mary’s is below average. 高于/低于平均

3. The average age of the boys in the class is 17.平均的

4. What is the average temperature in Wuhan in August?

5. If you average 7, 14 and 6, you get 9. 均分

6. On average, there are 20 boys present every day.平均来说

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of the word “average”

. average adj.平均的

verb .平均，均分。

Noun.平均数，平均值。

C. Complete the following sentences：

1.What is ______________(平均的年龄)the students in your class?

2.平均来说,每年大约有400人死于这种疾病.

On average 400 people die of the disease every year.

3.Temperatures in winter are __________ for the time of year.( 低于平均值) （below average ）

III. date

A. Present the following sentences.

1. What is date today? (日期 )

2. The vase is of an earlier date than that one.（时代）

3. Has the date for the meeting been fixed? （日期）

4. The boy asked her for a date, but was refused. （约会）

5. They’ve been dating for months and know each other better than before. （谈恋爱）

6. Don’t forget to date your letter. （注明日期）

7. Young people’s clothes date quickly nowadays, so if you want to be fashionable you have to keep a close eye on fashion.（过时，不流行）.

8. The property of the family dates from the war.（始于，追溯到）

9. The castle dates back to the 15th century. （始于，追溯到）

10. The information is out of date; you need to get the latest news.（过期了）

11. She likes to wear clothes that are up to date（.新式的, 现代的）

B. Ss read the sentences and point out the part of speech of the word

“date” and the meaning of the word and phrases.

date : 1) noun . 日期，时代，约会, 流行.

2）verb. 谈恋爱,注明日期, 过时,不流行. 始于，追溯到

C. Complete the following sentences

1. This kind of clothes is ______________.不流行了( out of date)

2. The church __________________. 始建于13 世纪.( dates back to / dates from the 13 century.)

3. Would you like to ___________ (定个日期开个舞会.)( fix a date for a party.)

IV. cover

A . Present the following sentences.

1. The small town which covers five square miles is famous for its

beautiful scenery. 占地

2. Not having been cleaned for a month, the desk was covered with

dust. 布满

3. Hundreds of reporters were sent to cover the Olympic Games held

in Greece. 采访

4. The noise was so loud that she covered her ears with her hands遮蔽

5. The doctor’s talk covered the complete history of medicine. 涉及

6. I can cover 100 miles before it gets dark. 走一段路

7. Will $50 cover the cost of a new shirt? 够付…钱

8. He always keeps a cover over his car. 覆盖物

9. May I have a look at the book whose cover is blue? 封面

B. Read the sentences above and pay attention to the meaning of the

word “cover”.

Cover : Verb占地,布满,采访, 遮蔽,涉及, 走一段路,够付…钱

noun 覆盖物,封面

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. Do you know _______________________. ( 这个国家占地多少) (how much the country covers )

2. His desk ___________________________ ( 堆满了书). ( is covered with books)

3. Who will be sent to __________________________ ( 采访这次运动会)？ ( cover the sports meeting)

4. His book, _______________________ ( 封面是绿色), was a birthday gift from his mother. ( whose cover is green / the cover of which is green)

V. dress

A. present the following sentences.

1. Jim isn’t old enough to dress himself. ( 穿衣服)

2. How long does it take you to dress yourself? 穿衣

3. He has to dress well in his position. 穿戴

4. She was in special dress for the ceremony. 套装

5. She was wearing a silk dress. 连衣裙

B. Read and observe the sentences and point out how the word dress is used.

C. Present more sentences with similar phrases and tell the differences.

1. He was dressed in white and was easy to be recognized in the crowd.

2. He put on his coat and went to the cinema.

3. The emperor had nothing on when he thought he was in his new clothes.

4. Nobody is allowed to wear a beard in that village.

5. What shall I wear to attend her birthday party?

6. she was all in black.

D. Choose the right phrase to complete the following sentences.

1. She was ___________ the white _______ her mother bought for her yesterday. ( wearing, dress)

2. Don’t forget to _________ your hat, or you’ll get burnt. ( put on)

3. We are going to be late. Please get __________ quickly. ( dressed)

4. The child is too small to _____________ himself. ( dress)

5. Do you think I need to ___________ any jewellery to attend her wedding? ( wear )

6. On Children’s Day, the children _____their best clothes ______. (have…on )

7. The girl _____ red is my former student.( in )

VI. find

A. Present the following sentences.

1. The most amazing find was two gold earrings.

2. The old painting is quite a find.

3. I found a ten-dollar bill on the road.

4. I found him asleep on the sofa.

5. Please find the key for me. = Please find me the key.

6. When a waiter asks a customer, “ How do you find the soup?” He wants to know what the customer thinks of the soup.

7. I find it difficult to understand this film.

8. I was disappointed to find him out.

9. After school I always find him waiting at the school gate.

10. The poor man found his house broken into.

11. You should find out the answer by yourself.

B. Read the sentences, and pay attention to how “find” is used.

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. ______________________________ ( 最有趣的发现) was two dolls lying in the drawer. ( The most interesting find)

2. ____________________________ ( 你觉得这个演讲怎么样？) ( How do you find the speech? )

3. He ___________________________ ( 发现很容易) to get along with his new classmates. ( finds it easy)

4. Whenever he comes back from school, he always _________________________________ ( 发现他的狗坐在门外) waiting for him. ( finds his dog sitting outside)

5. When he woke up the next morning, _________________________________ ( 他发现屋外的世界完全地改变了). ( found the world outside completely changed)

Unit20. Grammar

1. Teaching Goal:

Review the use of “it”. Let students learn how to use “it” by doing some practice in reading, writing and so on.

2. Teaching important points:

The usages of it in different situations.

3. Teaching difficult points:

How to teach the students to master the usages of it

4. Teaching methods:

Observe the materials given to them, generalize from the different examples.

5. Teaching aids:

a projector , a blackboard and paper

6. Teaching procedures:

Step1 Lead in.

Read the following the sentences, and pay your attention to the meaning and the function of “it” in each sentence.

1. It is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing. Textbook (P3)

2. With the right kind of body, it is possible to float around in the ocean. (P20)

3. Isn’t it amazing that a single substance can be so important to our planet and even the whole universe. (P20)

4. It is very relaxing to take a dip in the pool in summer. (P37)

5. It was during the “ Match on Washington DC” in 1963 that he gave the speech “ I have a dream”. (P28)

6. It was also in Atlanta that one of the great leaders of the Civil Rights Movement, Dr Martin Luther King, Jr, was born. (P44)

7. Zhongguanchun made it possible for him to follow his dreams and help the country he loves. (P3)

8. -“Relying on science, technology and knowledge to increase economic power” makes it clear that science and business can and must work together to build the future. (P4)

9. It was through trade and cultural links that European culture and new techniques were brought to Britain.

10. It has been proved that the copper knives came from the places as distance as Spain and western France.

Step 2 Learn the usages of “it” according to the following sentences, dialogues, and exercises.

1. -Where is your car?

-It is in the garage.

(指提到过的或正在谈论的动物或事情)

2. The young couple has a newborn baby. Do you know it is a boy or a girl?

(父母不会用it来指自己的孩子。it可以不区别他们的性别)

3. -It is seven o’clock. There is a knock at the door. Who is it?

-It is the milkman.

4. -Oh, by the way, there was a telephone call for you. Who was it?

-It was my Mum on the phone.

( it可以用来指时间，有人敲门，确认某人为何人，在电话里)

5. It is raining a whole day. It is perfectly cool. It has been a long time since the last rain.

(it可以用来谈论时间，日期，距离，天气等，但要作主语)

6. My grandmother kept telling me that I should help her with housework, but it didn’t help.

(it指前面的整个内容，即：祖母喋喋不休地让我帮助她做些家务)

7. It is no use quarrelling with such a man.

It’s hard for them to answer such difficult questions.

It seems that I have made the same mistake once again.

It is unclear what we should do next week.

It is reported that another big earthquake will happen in the area soon.

It will take you three hours to fly to Hong kong from Beijing.

(it作形式主语)

Exercise:

⑴. Is ______ necessary to finish the composition before May Day.

A. this B. that C. it D. he

⑵. Does ______ matter if I can’t finish the composition before May Day?

A. this B. that C. he D. it

⑶. ______ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.

A. There B. This C. That D. It

⑷. In fact ______ is a hard job for the police to keep order in an football match.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

⑸. It worried her a bit ______ her was turning grey.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

( Keys ⑴ C ⑵ D ⑶ D ⑷ D ⑸ B )

8. He is a heavy smoker. I find it difficult to persuade him to give up smoking.

We soon make it a rule to walk two miles a day.

We take it for granted that water is free at restaurants.

I don’t like it when you shout at your parents.

I don’t feel it my duty to do so.

I hate it when people talk with their mouths full.

(形式宾语)

Exercise:

⑴. They have made ______ a rule ______ in the room.

A. this; not to smoke B. it; smoking

C. it; to not smoke D. it; not to smoke

⑵. I don’t think ______ possible to master a foreign language without much memory work.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑶. The chairman thought ______ necessary to invite professor Smith to speak at the meeting.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑷. I think ______ to finish the work in such a short time is quite impossible.

A. it B. that C. this D. with

⑸ Don’t ______ that all those who get good grades in the entrance examination will prove to be most successful.

A. take as granted B. take this for granted

C. take that for granted D. take it for granted

(Keys: ⑴ D ⑵ D ⑶ B ⑷ B ⑸D )

9. 1). It was Tom who / that broke the window.

2). It was her whom you should ask.

3). It was because Li Ping was ill that he didn’t come to school last week.

4). It was where you come from that you should return to.

5). It was as you like that you must do everything.

6). It was not until 1920 that regular radio broadcasts began

7). It was in the library that was founded by Mr. Willians

that they finished reading the famous novel.

8). It was neither you nor he that is willing to go the park.

9). It was not only you but also he that is willing to go to the Great Wall.

10). It was his coming that made all of us very happy.

Exercise

⑴ It was the ability to the job ________ matters not where you come from or what you are.

A. one B. that C. what D. it

⑵ I have already forgotten _________ you put the dictionary.

A. that it was where B. where it was that

C. where was it that D. that where was it.

⑶ Was it _________ Sandy’s carelessness _________ your keys were all lost.

A. because; which B. for; what

C. because of; that D. since; why

⑷ It was not long _______ he was born ________ his mother died.

A. before; that B. since; when

C. until; when D. after that

⑸ It was in the factory ________ was owned by Mr. White ______ they learned a lot from the workers.

A. that; where B. which; that

C. what; that D. which; where

⑹ ______ was it in 1979 ______ I graduated from the University.

A. That; that B. It; that

C. That; when D. It; when

⑺ It was not until he finished all his homework _______ to bed last night.

A. did he go B. when he went

C. that he went D. then he went

⑻ ＿＿ Where did you meet Johnson?

＿＿ It was in the hotel ______ he stayed.

A. that B. where C. when D. while

(Keys: ⑴ B ⑵ B ⑶ C ⑷ A ⑸ B ⑹ B ⑺ C ⑻ B

10. 1. It is time for school.

2. It is time to go to school.

3. It is time for us to go to school.

4. It is time that we went to school.

综合练习:

1. It wasn’t until nearly a month later ______ I received the manager’s reply.

A. since B. when C. as D. that

2. Can ______ be in the desk ______ you have put my letter?

A. it; which B. I; where C. you; in which D. it; that

3. - ______ that he managed to get the information?

- Oh, a friend of his helped him.

A. Where was it B. What was it

C. How was it D. Why was it

4. It is what you do rather than what you say ______ matters?

A. that B. what C. which D. this

5. It was some time ______ we realized the true.

A. when B. until C. since D. before

6. It was in the lab ______ was taken charge of by professor Zhang ______ they did the experiment.

A. when; that B. which; where C. that; where D. which; that

7. I like ______ in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.

A. this B. that C. it D. one

8. - He was nearly drowned once.

- when was ______?

- ______ was in when he was in middle school.

A. that; It B. this; This C. this; It D. that; This

(Keys: 1 D 2 D 3 C 4 A 5 D 6 D 7 C 8 A

Unit20. Integrating skills

Roots of Chinese Culture

Teaching aims:

1. Help the students get the general idea of the text.

2. Help students know the importance of the relics and have correct sense to protect them.

3. Teach the students how to create a flow chart.

Teaching procedures:

VII. Step1. Lead-in

Show students some pictures of unearthed objects in Snxingdui, and ask them questions such as: Have you seen the pictures? What do you think of them? When and where were they found?

VIII. Step2. Fast reading

Ask the students to read the text quickly and them summarize the main idea of the text.

Paragraph1. The discovery of Jinsha Relics.

Paragraph2. The similarities between Jinsha Relics and Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph3. The importance of the discovery of Jinsha Ruins Relics.

Paragraph4.The discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph5. The importance of the discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Step3. Careful reading

1. Ask the students to listen and read paragraph by paragraph and then do the exercises.

Paragraph1.

1. What kind of special relics were unearthed in Jinsha Ruins?

2. Why could they take the archaeologists’ attention?

Because the ivory and animal bones found in Jinsha Village are important ,they will serve as important materials for the study of local geography, climate and the environment in ancient times.

3. Who was the first to discover the Jinsha Ruins and when?

Construction workers from a local company found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building road there on February 8, .

Paragraph2.

Why is cong special?

Because it was not made in Sichuan, but was transported there, which proved that Sichuan had trade links with the Yangtze and Yellow River valleys at that time.

Paragraph3.

What is the significance of the discoveries in Jinsha Village?

The discoveries there proves that the history of Sichuan is much longer than 2300 years.

Paragraph4.

True or false:

1. Sanxingdui Ruins were first discovered by farmers.

2. The farmers hesitated about whether to give the relics to the state.

3.The local teachers and officials persuaded them to turn in the relics.

Paragraph5.

1. Since 1920, what have been unearthed in Sanxingdui Ruins Site?

More than 10,000 relics dating back to between 5000 BC and 3000 BC have been discovered. 53 holes were dug up and over 1,200 pieces, including bronze and gold masks, bronze objects and images, jade and ivory had been found.

2. What do archaeologists hope to discover in the future?

They hope to discover some of the mysterious palaces, tombs of kings and bronze and jade workshops.

True or false:

1. From 1929 to 1986, 53 holes were dug and over 1200 pieces of objects were found.

2. Today, the work in Sanxingdui has already been done.

2. Then let students to fill in the blanks.

What’s the link between Jinsha Ruins and Sanxingdui Ruins?

Civilizations Jinsha Ruins Sanxingdui Ruins

time

Who found it

Objects found

3. Reading comprehension.

1. The passage suggests that ______.

A. Jinshan Relics and Sanxingdui Relics were found by chance

B. archaeologists knew there were a lot of treasures there long ago

C. Yan Kaizong is not a patriot.

D. archeologists will never find another relics again.

2. Which of the following statements is right according to the text?

A. Jinsha had no trade links with other areas.

B. The ivory and animal bones found at Jinsha are of no real value.

C. Sichuan has a history of more than 2300 years.

D. Many of the relics at Jinsha have no connection with those found at Sanxingdui.

3. At Jinsha Relics, archaeologists found_________.

A. gold and jade

B. bronze and stone objects

C. many ivories

D. all of the above

4. Archaeologists are scientists who_______.

A.study nature

B. do research on animals

C. study the buried remains of ancient times

D. give instructions to students

5. We can infer from the passage that ________.

A. China has a long history with a rich culture

B. Yan Kaizong kept the relics found by his grandfather as his own

C. since 1986, archaeologists have stopped digging at Jinsha Relics

D. Sanxingdui Relics was first discovered by archaeologist

Keys: A C D C A

IX. Step4. Discussion

1. Why do you think the text is titled with “Roots of Chinese Culture” instead of “Sanxingdui Ruins”?

2. Do you think Yan Kaizong was foolish? Why?

X. Step5. Writing

1. After construction workers found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building roads there, what steps and decisions did they take? Then the teacher lists the all the steps and decisions on the blackboard.

2. Ask the students to decide in which order steps and decisions were taken.

3. Ask the students to create different shapes for different types for action, for example: triangles for decisions, circles for the discoveries, boxes for things that are going on and diamonds when calling in other people.

4. Then ask the students to draw the arrows to show the direction of the flow.

5. Ask the students to check for missing steps.

6. Just now we have made a poster showing a flow chart of “Jinsha Village”, can you make a poster showing a flow chart of “something has been stolen”? Please make it yourselves.

7. Please check your answer with the chart on page 80.

8. Ask the students to make a poster showing a flow chart of the things you should do when you have discovered some old things in the ground.

Example:

篇5：高二11单元教案(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

Scientific Achievements

Tasks which should be achieved in this unit:

a. Achieve language skills and related knowledge about the topic of science and scientific achievements;

b. Learn to express intentions and wishes:

1. My plan is to…….

2. I hope that…..

3. I want/wish/hope/intend/plan to…..

4. I’d like to,,,,

5. I’m thinking of ….

6. It is likely that…

c. Vocabulary in this unit:

likely, private, grasp, master, perfect, arrange, locate, luggage, boom, announce.

d. Useful expressions:

in store, in the late 1990s, grasp the opportunity, hear about, set foot, have a positive effect on…, as well as, rely on, deal with, come to life, put forward, make many breakthroughts, map out.

e. Grammar:

word formation (1)

compounds:

Nouns:

n+n : classroom, newspaper, workshop, bookcase, bookworm

adj+n: blackboard; highway, greenhouse

v+n: pickpocket; chopstick

adv+n: overcoat; outhouse;

n+prep+n: son-in-law; father-in-law

-ing+n: reading-room; dining-hall; sleeping-car

v+adv: get-together; breakthrough(突破)

pron+n: he-goat; she-wolf

Adjectives:

N+adj: snowwhite; worldwide; manlike;

Adj+adj: red-hot; darkblue

Adv+adj: evergreen

N+PP/-ing: man-made; snow-covered; English-speaking; peace-loving

Adj+PP/-ing: good-looking; easy-going; ready-made; new-born

Adv+PP/-ing: hardworking; farseeing; well-written; well-known;wide-spread

Adj+n: barefoot; new-type

Num+n: second-hand; five-year; 100-meter

Num+n+adj: five-year-old; three-inch-wide

Num/Noun/dj+n-ed: four-footed; three-legged; iron-hearted; cold-blooded; warm-hearted

Verbs:

Adv/n/adj+verbs: overcome; overflow; upset; underline; sunbathe; sleepwalk; whitewash; blacklist(列入黑名单)

Adverbs:

N+n: sideway

N+adv: head-on

Adj+n: meanwhile; meantime

Prep+n: beforehand (事先)

Teaching procedure:

Period 1.

Contents: Warming up & reading comprehension

Step 1.Warming up

Aim: Make students familiar with some words and expressions on the topic.

1. Brainstorming:

Find as many words as the students can find about Scientific achievements using some pictures as hinders:

Electricity; cars; aeroplanes; The Internet; Cloning; The Theory of Gravity; Nuclear science; solar energy; gene technology

2. Discussing the questions on P1 and then the questions:

How do they improve our daily life? How do they change our society?

Step 2. Pre-reading

1. Show some pictures of Zhongguancun.

2. group work:

if you want to do research or start a hi-tech company, what preparations you should make?

Step 3. While-reading

1. Scanning: Ss read quickly and answer the following question:

What is the passage mainly about?

2. Ss read and get the main ideas of each paragraph. Make an outline if possible.

Step 4. After-reading

Finish the post-reading Ex on P4.

Step 5. Assignment

1. surf the internet and get more information about the topic.

2. if you are asked to introduce Zhongguancun to oversea Chinese students, what must be included in your speech? Just think over and prepare an outline.

Period 2.

Contents: difficulties in the passage.

Step 1. Warming up

Ask some Ss to present their outlines.

Step 2. Learning about the language:

Play the tape for students to follow.

Teacher explain some language points in the text on page 19--20.

1. Whatever great achievements the future may have in store for China, it is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing.

Whatever = no matter how 引导让步状语从句。

Whatever还可引导名词性从句，意为“所。。。的一切事情”。例如：

He always keep calm whatever happens.

It is unwise to give a child what ever he or she wants.

In store 意思是“就要到来，必将发生”；这个介词短语还有“储备着”的意思。

Be likely “有可能的”

He is likely to finish the work on time.

It is likely that he she will finish the work on time.

2. it was wonderful, like a dream come true.

Like 用作连词，引导方式状语从句，与as，as if 相似。

Like I said just now, I won’t do that foolish things.

3. One of the mottos for the park – “Rely on science, technology and knowledge to increase economic power”-makes it clear that science and business can and must work together to build the future.

rely on/upon “依赖，依靠”

You must rely on our own effort to do it.

3. Not all the new company can succeed, but the spirit and creativity they present are more important than money.

Step 3. Practice

Ss finish on page 5 by themselves and then check the answers.

Step 4. Assignment

1. Learn the useful expressions by heart.

2. Finish Ex1 –3 on page 82-83 on WB

3. read the whole passage aloud.

Period 3.

Contents: Grammar; talking and speaking

Step 1. Revision

Check the answers of Ex 1 -- 3 on page 82 and 83.

Step 2. Word formations

1. introduce the main ways of word formation: (the following may be of help during your teaching)

The main Processes of English Word-formation:

a. Prefixation: disagree, unimportant, non-smoker, minibus, overuse, antibiotics, underdeveloped, post-war, pre-school, renew, bimonthly, multi-racial;

b. Suffixation: percentage, girlhood, Londoner, hostess, employee, puzzlement, hopeless, changeable, talkative, deepen;

c. Conversion: desire-v. to long for, to wish/ n. strong longing, earnest wish; hit-v, to give a blow/ n. blow; They downed the tools.

d. Compounding: deadline, above-mentioned, chewing-gum, sun-bather, table talk, fathead, redcap, easygoing, sleep-walk,

The minor processes of English word-formation:

a. clipping or shortening: phone (for telephone), ad (for advertisement), prof (for professor), flu (for influenza), pub (for public house);

b. Acronyms(首字母缩略词): UN, VIP, NATO,DA (Doctor of Arts) , H-bomb (Hydrogen bomb);

c. lending: branch, motel, Eurasia,

d. Back-formation: to beg from beggar, to baby-sit from baby-sitter, to greed from greedy.

f. Forming new words by analogy:

Moonrise is derived from the word sunrise by analogy.

e. Onomatopoeia:

Bark, giggle, bang, murmur.

2. Ss study examples on p6 and see if they can tell the processes of the words.

3. More exercises to consolidate the Grammar.

EX1-4 on p6 & ex1-5 on page 83-84 of WB.

Step 3. Talking

1. Ss four in one group and have a discussion about the topics on page 7.

2. Ss make notes during the discussion, and try to report the topic to the whole class.

Step 4. Speaking

Ss work in pairs and discuss their intentions and wishes..

The following structures are helpful to students:

1. My plan is to…….

2. I hope that…..

3. I want/wish/hope/intend/plan to…..

4. I’d like to,,,,

5. I’m thinking of ….

6. It is likely that…

Step 5. Assignment

Writing on page 86.

Period 4.

Contents: Integrating skills:

Step 1. Warming up

Ask Ss some questions about great achievements in science and technology.

Step 2. Reading

1. Ss read the passage :

2. Help Ss to understand the passage entirely.

Step 3. Writing

Finish the writing task on p 8.

You can give Ss some strategies for writing a short essay, or give them an outline if necessary.

(The following material may ease your work.)

Internet ---- the greatest achievement of this century

Argument 1: Internet changes our daily life.

Details: a. make communication easier.

b. change our ways of shopping.

c. get to know outside world more quickly.

Argument 2: Internet make our work easier.

Details: a/b/c

Argument 3: Internet accelerate the development of science and technology.

Details : a/b/c

Period 5.

(Listening)

Step 1. Listening

1. Ss finish the listening task on page 2.

2. Ss listen to the tape again and check the answers.

Step 2. dealing with the Ex 1-4 on p 95 of Workbook.

Step 3. Listening skills

Give the students some tips on how to improve listening while checking the Ex.

a . make notes while listening;

b. grasp the most important information

Step 4. Finish the Listening Ex on p81.

Period 6.

Revision:

Go over the important points in this unit once again, and give Ss some additional reading materials if possible.

Zhongguancun Science Park is China's biggest science park with a high concentration of scientific and technological institutions and intellectual resources. Located in this area are 39 institutions of higher learning represented by Beijing University and Tsinghua University. There are 213 research institutions as exemplified by the institutions of the Chinese Academy of Sciences (CAS) and the Chinese Academy of Engineering (CAE) and 37% of the academicians of both the CAS and CAE are living and working in this area. Each year, thousands of sophisticated research discoveries emerge in this area and pour out to all places throughout China. Many state-level laboratories and important engineering and technology centers are concentrated in this area too. Zhongguancun Science Park is the largest software development and production center in China.

Zhongguancun Science Park in fact is composed of five science zones like Haidian Zone, Fengtai Zone, Changping Zone, the Electronic City Zone and Yizhuang Zone. Some ten thousand new and hi-tech enterprises, such as Legend, Stone, Founder, Zhongguancun Science and Technology, Tsinghua Tongfang, Netease, are all doing their business at Zhongguancun. In addition, there are some 1500 R&D centers and hi-tech companies set up by or invested by renowned overseas transnational companies like IBM, Microsoft, Mitsubishi in this area as well as 40 overseas listed companies. At present Zhongguancun has become the most important growth point in the economic development of the capital which makes a contribution of 60% of the total industrial growth of the city. The business income generated from the industry, trade and technology of Zhongguancun Science Park in 2001 accounted for 18% of the total income of all the 53 national new and hi-tech parks.

In June , the State Council of China officially approved the “Note of Request to Expedite the Building of Zhongguancun Science Park for the Purpose of Implementing the Strategy of Rejuvenating the Country through Science and Education” by the Beijing Municipal Government and the Ministry of Science and Technology and instructed the Beijing Municipal Government and the Ministry of Science and Technology to speed up the construction process of Zhongguancun Science Park in order to build it into a comprehensive reform trial base for implementing the strategy of rejuvenating the country through science and education and the two essential changes, a model base of international technical innovation with competitiveness, an incubator and radiating center for its scientific and technological achievements with its footing in the capital city of Beijing but facing the whole country and a base for training innovators and a first-class science park in the world. This is the most important trans-century decision made by the central government after its decisions of establishing the Shenzhen Special Zone in 1980s and opening up Shanghai's Pudong area in 1990s.

Beijing People's Municipal Government promulgated “Regulations of the Zhongguancun Science Park” on January 1, 2001, which provides the legal basis and guideline for its future development. The Park is now moving on at vigorous strides in promoting technology innovation in accordance with the principle of “Bold innovation in the areas not banned by the law” with the ambition of achieving great changes every year and make the Park a first-rate science park in the world within 10 years.

Zhongguancun is indeed a place full of opportunities and challenges as well as bright hopes. All domestic and overseas companies and individuals are welcome to Zhongguancun for business development.

Period 7.

Teachers can use this period freely.

Suggestion : Teachers can use this period to let Ss sum up what they have learned and explain what Ss couldn’t understand very well in this unit. Teachers can also add more practice in this period to consolidate what the Ss have learned. Finally, ask the Ss to finish Assessing on page 87. It is very important to improve their learning and let them have a sense of achieving gradually.

篇6：Unit 11 单元学习导航(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

学习目标导航

XUE XI MU BIAO DAO HANG 学习提示

话

题 1.Talk about science and scientific achievement.

2.Write a persuasion essay. 1.重点掌握与中心话题“科学成就”有关的语言知识和技能。

2.学会写说明文。

功

能 1.If I got the money, I would…

I want/wish/hope/intend/plan to…

I hope that…; My plan is to…

2.I’ d like to…

I’ m thinking of… 练习表示intentions（意图）和wishes（愿望）的常用句型，熟练掌握其用法。

词

汇 likely, overseas, grasp, master, arrange, rely, failure, achieve, announce, locate 1.掌握本单元单词的常见用法，注意其构成。

2.重点掌握并能熟练运用所列词组的用法。

set foot, rely on, put forward, come to life

语

法 Word Formation (abbreviation) ：

ad (advertisement) 广告

CSA (Chinese Space Agency) 中国航天局

IT (information technology) 信息技术

NATO (North Atlantic Treaty Organization) 北大西洋公约组织 1.了解英语中最常用的派生法、复合法和转换法三种构词方法。

2.重点掌握下列四种缩略构词法：截断词，首字母连写词，首字母拼音词和拼缀词。

单元要点

Word

study

1.engineering 2.solar 3.significant 4.mankind 5.constitution 6.zone 7.private 8.grasp 9.master 10.perfect 11.arrange 12.rely 13.failure 14.locate 15.valley 16.brand 17.luggage 18.achieve 19.organ 20.boom 21.breakthrough 22.agency 23.announce 24.evolution 25.supercomputer 26.likely 1.工程；工程学 2.太阳的；日光的 3.意义重大的 4.人类 5.宪法 6.区域；地带 7.私人的；非公开的 8.抓住；理解 9.硕士；主人 10.完美的；理想的 11.安排；整理；布置 12.依靠；指望 13.失败；失败的人 14.把……设置在；使……坐落于；指出……的位置 15.山谷 16.商标；牌子 17.行李 18.大道；实现；完成19.器官；机关；风琴 20.繁荣期；迅速发展期 21.重大突破 22.代理（机构） 23.宣布；宣告 24.发展；展开 25.超级计算机 26.可能的；预期的

Useful expressions 1.genetic engineering 2.the theory of gravity 3.nuclear science 4.solar energy 5.great scientific achievements 6.have something in common 7.the first person to travel in time 8.a cure for AIDS 9.a manned space ship 10.start a company 11.spend time doing sth. 12.in store 13.it is likely that 14.more than 15.set up 16.in the late 1990s 17.the Chinese Academy of sciences 18.within the next ten years 19.a growing number of

1.基因工程 2.万有引力理论 3.核科学 4.太阳能 5.伟大的科学成就6.有共同之处 7.时间旅行第一人 8.艾滋病治疗方法 9.载人飞船 10.开办一家公司 11.花时间做某事12.存储 13.很有可能…… 14.不仅仅，多于 15.建立 16.在20世纪90年代末 17.中科院 18.在接下来的十年里 19.不停增加数量的

Useful expressions 20.make it possible for sb.to do sth.21.follow one’s dreams 22.top scientists 23.master’s degree 24.a dream come true 25.set foot in… 26.run a small company 27.have a positive effect on… 28.rely on 29.build the future 30.deal with 31.learn from… 32.be excited about… 33.be located in… 34.contribute to… 35.in the near future 36.be filled with 37.enjoy a boom 38.put forward a plan 39.make many breakthroughs 40.sth.be used to do 41.manned space flight 42.allow sb.to do sth.43.human genetic project 44.for the first time ever 45.the deadly disease 20.使某人做某事成为可能寻某人的梦想 22.顶级科学家 21.追23.硕士学位 24.一个梦想实现 25.涉足于…… 26.开办一家小公司 27.对于……有积极影响 28.依靠于 29.创造未来 30.处理 31.向……学习32.对于……很兴奋 33.位于…… 34.作贡献于…… 35.在不久的将来 36.充满 37.经历迅速发展期 38.提出一个计划 39.取得许多突破 40.某物被用来做41.载人太空飞行 42.允许某人做某事 43.人类基因组计划 44.第一次 45.致命的疾病

Sentence

patterns &

Communicative

English 1.If I got the money,I would …

2.My plan is to …

3.I hope that …

4.I want/wish/hope/intend/plan to …

5.I’d like to …

6.I’m thinking of …

Grammar Word-formation:

1.prefix and suffix

2.compounds 构词法:

1.前缀，后缀

2.合成词

Topics &Writing 1.Talk about science and scientific achievement.

2.Practise expressing intensions and wishes.

3.Learn about Word-formation.

4.Write a persuasion essay.

Language points.

1．constitution

1) 宪法the Constitution of the United States / the American Constitution

2) 体格，体质He has a weak constitution

3) 构造，构成the constitution of starch (淀粉的构成)

2．achievement (U)取得，完成（C）成就，成绩（V）achieve

development government movement equipment

vt 完成达到（目的），得到

1） By hard working we can achieve anything.

2） We have achieved success in developing the product.

3．Mankind 人类 manmade (adj) Manly 有男子气概的；刚强的

4．in store(for sb./sth.):coming in the future;about to happen

e.g.There is a surprise in store for you.

I can see trouble in store.

5．Likely 1) be likely to do sth 很可能（发生某种情况）Our team is likely to win the game.

2) it is likely that + 从句

It is likely that we’ll go on a picnic in the forest tomorrow.

辨析：likely, possible与probable

Likely 常用词，指“从表面现象看很有可能”

Possible 指“由于有适当的条件和方法，某事可能发生或做到”，强调“客观上有可能”，但“实际希望很小”。

Probable 语气比possible 强，指“有根据、合情理、值得相信的事物，带有大概，很可能的意思”

Likely 之后常跟不定式（be likely to do sth）而possible与probable之后通常不跟不定式；

Likely 的主语可以是人，而possible与probable的主语不能是人。

6．set up

1) 建立，成立 Set up home

Edison set up a chemical lab of his own at the age of ten.

2) 树立起来Let’s set up the tent first.

3) 使（自己或他人）从事某职业（as）

He has set himself up as a bookseller. 他开始经营书籍。

set about doing sth 着手做 set out to do sth Set an example

set fire to 点火；放火Set off 出发，动身Set foot in (on) 登上；涉足；访问

set foot in/on sth.: enter or visit(a place);arrive

e.g. Don’t ever set foot in this house again!

Who was the first man to set foot on the moon.

7．Private adj 私人的；私立的；不公开的

Private property Private school

a private door 便门in private 在私下，秘密地in public 公开地

8．grasp vt

1) 抓住 grasp sb by the arm

2) (= understand ) 掌握，领会

Grasp sb’s meaning

3) n (常用单数) 紧握；把握；理解；理解力

Beyond sb’s grasp 力量达不到 Grasp all, lose all. 样样都要，全数失掉。 Within sb’s grasp 力量达得到

9．Master n 硕士；（男）主人；能手；雇主；大师

Mistress n 女主人 Masterless adj 无主的

Mastermind n 非常聪明的人 Masterkey n 万能钥匙

Masterpiece(masterwork) n 杰作 The master of the house 家长

Master and man雇主与雇工 A master in literature 文学大师

Master of Arts (MA) 文学硕士 Master of Science (MS) 理学硕士

Bachelor 学士 doctor 博士

vt 掌握；精通；控制；统治

Master a foreign language

Man can master nature.

10. perfect adj 理想的；完美的；绝对的；完全的；（动词的）完成的

His reading is perfect.

He is a perfect stranger to us.

The perfect tense

vt 使完美

They worked hard to perfect their dance.

Practice makes perfect 熟能生巧

Be perfect in English 精通英语

11．arrange

vt 安排，筹划；整理，布置

1） We have arranged a party.

2） He arranged the books on the shelf.

n arrangement

(C pl) 安排；准备工作（U，C）整理；排列；布置

12. have an effect on 对……产生影响

Take effect 开始生效；开始实行

In effect = in fact 实际上

13. rely on / upon : depend on…依赖，依靠；信赖，信任

We should rely on our own efforts. 我们应该自力更生。

You may rely on it that she won’t be late.你可以放心，她不会迟到的。

14．make it clear （that）…表明，讲清楚

e.g. She made it clear that she objected to the proposal.

She made clear her objections.

15．Failure (v fail) 失败(U)，失败的人或事（C）

Failure is the mother of success.

He is a failure as an artist, but a success as an art teacher.他不是一个成功的艺术家，但是个成功的美术老师。

16．come to life: back to normal state, esp. of mind苏醒过来，恢复生气，活跃起来

After three hours’ saving, the injured man came to life.

When I mentioned our plans for a trip abroad, the kids came back to life at once.

17. mark

n 痕迹；符号；商标；分数；特征

an ink mark a question mark full marks make a mark 作标记

vt 做标记；留痕迹于；表明；批分数，评成绩

a dirt road marked with footprints 留有脚印的泥路

be marked with 标着……；(人、动物等身上)具有

Her face is marked with sadness. 她面露悲哀。

mark examination papers.

18. outstanding

1) 杰出的，突出的（ stand out ）一名杰出的学生 an outstanding student

2) 未完结的；未清的；未付的

Outstanding debts 未付清的欠款

19．Breakthrough n 重大突破，突围；突破性的发现，成就

A military breakthrough 军事突破A scientific breakthrough 科学成就

20．enable

en-使+able能……的

enrich enlarge

strengthen strength(力量)+ en (使) vt 加强，增强 vi 变强

they strengthened the city wall..

the wind strengthened.

deep--deepen

Sharp-sharpen

Wide--widen

21. organ n 器官；风琴；机构，机关

The eyes are the organ of sight.

state organs

a government organ

adj organic 有机物的；有机体的

n organism (C)生物，有机体，有机组织

vt organize 组织

N organization 团体，机构，组织

22. put forward 提出（建议、意见）；推荐，提名

He put forward a better plan.

We put her forward as chairman of the committee.

23. aim (sth) at sth/doing sth (把……)瞄准；目的在于；企图

He aimed his gun at the target.

Those girls worked out every morning, aiming at losing weight.

知识点讲解

1． You and your team are working on a cure for Aids. 你和你的队员正在从事艾滋病的治疗工作。

（1）work on “从事于（某项工作）”；“设法说服” eg:

They worked on the old car late into the night. 他们修这辆旧汽车一直修到深夜。

What are you doing? We are working on some wood-cuts. 你们在干什么呀？我们正在创作一些木刻。

Can you work on him to change his mind?你能说服他改变主意吗？

（2）work at “学习，研究，致力于……” eg:

They have worked at this subject for many years. 他们研究这门科学好多年了。

（3）work out 做出；算出；设计出 eg:

This problem will not work out. 这道题算不出来。

They have worked out a method of sending a spacecraft to Mars.

他们已经设计出一种向火星发射宇宙飞船的方法。

2．extremely adv. to a very high degree 极端地；极度地 eg:

It was an extremely difficult and dangerous task. 这是一项极度困难和危险的工作。

extreme adj. reaching the highest degree 极度的 eg:

extreme patience/kindness 极度的耐心/仁慈 in extreme pain 在极度痛苦中

3． cure (1)n. ①[C] curing or being cured 治疗；治愈。 eg:

His cure took six months. 他的病花了六个月治疗。

②[C]substance or treatment which cures 治疗的药物；治疗法 eg:

Is there a certain cure for cancer yet? 迄今对癌症有治疗方法吗？

（2）vt. & vi. bring sb. back to health; get rid of one’s illness/habits eg:

This medicine will cure your headache. 这药可以治好你的头痛。

A few days’ rest will cure you. 休息几天你就痊愈了。

③（词组） cure sb. of one’s illness or bad habits 治愈疾病，改掉坏习惯 eg:

Moving to the country cured her of asthma. 搬到乡下她的哮喘病就好了。

He was cured of his habit of smoking. 他改掉了吸烟的坏习惯。

4． You are working on sending a manned spaceship to Mars. 你正在从事向火星发射载人宇宙飞船的工作。

（1）manned adj. (of machines esp. in space) having men on board （飞船等）载人的 eg:

the development of manned from unmanned space craft从无人向载人飞船的发展

（2）man-made adj. produced by the work of men; not found in nature 人造的 eg:

The lake is a man-made one. 这是个人工湖。

We have sent up many man-made satellites. 我们发射了多少颗人造卫星。

生词和词组

1．likely adj. (1) that is expected 很可能发生的；有希望的 eg:

Is he likely to win? 他有可能获胜吗？

The most likely result is a draw. 最可能的结果是不分胜负。

(2)that seems reasonable, suitable or right for a purpose 似乎合理的 eg:

That’s a likely excuse. 那似乎是个合理的借口。

(3)be likely to do… 很可能会……

It’s likely that… 可能会（有，发生）…… eg:

He is not likely to succeed. 他大概不会成功。

It is likely that he will be late. =He is likely to be late. 他可能会迟到。

2． grasp vt. , vi. & n.

(1)v. ①seize firmly with hand(s) or arm(s) 抓住；抱住；紧握 eg:

The boy grasped his mother’s hand firmly. 那个小男孩紧握住妈妈的手。

He grasped the rope and pulled it. 他抓紧绳子用力拉。

②understand with the mind 领悟；理解 eg:

I couldn’t grasp the teacher’s meaning. 我没领悟老师的意思。

(2)n. firm hold or grip; power of grasping 紧握；抓紧；领悟力 eg:

He doesn’t have a thorough grasp of the problem. 他没有彻底理解这个问题。

(3)短语：beyond/within a person’s grasp 为某人所不能/能抓到的；为某人所不能/能理解的。

3． master vt. , vi & n.

(1) vt. ①become the master of; overcome 成为……的主人；征服；控制

eg: master one’s temper/feelings 控制脾气/感情

It’s difficult to master nature. 征服大自然是困难的。

②gain as a skill 精通；熟练 eg:

master English 精通英语 master foreign affairs 精通外交事务

He never mastered the art of the public speaking. 他从未掌握当众演讲的艺术。

(2)n. ①man who has others working for him 主人，雇主

②male head of a household 家里的男主人

③captain of a merchant ship 商船的船长

④male teacher 男教师 eg:

the master of the house 一家之长

the maths master 数学教师 a master’s degree 硕士学位

4．arrange vt. & vi.

(1)put in order 安排；排列；布置 eg:

She is good at arranging flowers. 她擅长插花。

Before going away, he arranged his business affairs. 他离开之前，他把业务都安排好了。

(2)make plans in advance 预做计划 eg:

The Tourist Bureau arranged everything for our journey to Rome. 旅游局为我们去罗马的旅行准备了一切。

(3)arrange+ n. +for +n. 为……安排…… eg:

Mother arranged an appointment for me with the dentist. 母亲替我向牙医预约挂号。

(4)arrange sb. to do … 安排某人做…… eg:

I have arranged him to meet her. 我安排他和她见面。

(5)arrange with sb. to do … 约定与某人做…… eg:

We arranged with his team to play a game of baseball. 我们约好和他们队打一场棒球。

(6)arrange that … 商定，安排。 eg:

He arranged that the meeting (should) be put off for a week. =

He arranged for the meeting to be put off for a week. 他安排把会议延后一周召开。

5． failure n.

(1)[U] failing; lack of success 失败；不成功 eg:

Failure is the mother of success. 失败乃成功之母。

(2)[C] instance of failing; person, attempt or thing that fails 失败的事例；失败的人，企图或失败的事物 eg:

He was a failure as a teacher. 他不是个好老师。

Success came after many failures. 失败多次之后终于成功。

6． locate vt. & vi.

(1)discover, show the locality of 找出……的位置，指出……的位置 eg:

locate a town on a map 在地图上找出一城市的位置

(2)establish in a place 在一地点设置 eg:

a new school to be located in the suburbs 将设置在郊区的一所新学校

(3)be located 位于 eg:

Our school is located in the center of the town. 我们学校坐落于市中心。

(4)比较location n.

[U] locating or being located 指定位置

[C] position or place 位置；地方 eg:

The hill is a good location for the new church. 那山丘是建筑新教堂的好地点。

7． organ n.

(1)any part of an animal body or plant 动植物器官 eg:

the organs of speech, the tongue, teeth, lips, etc. 语言器官（如舌、牙、唇等）

(2)organization 组织，机构 eg:

Parliament is the chief organ of the government. 国会是政府的主要机关。

(3)musical instrument from which sounds are produced by air forced through pipes, played by keys pressed with the fingers and pedals pressed with the feet 风琴

同、近义词辨析

1．likely, possible 与probable

（1）三者均表可能性，但意思有别。possible指客观上有可能性，但往往含有希望很小的意味；probable比possible可能性稍大，有“较为可能、大概”，指有实际依据；likely是从外表迹象判断有可能发生的事。 eg：

It’s possible, though not probable, that he will come tomorrow. 他明天可能来，但也不一定准来。

She is likely to ring me tonight. 今晚她很可能给我来电话。

（2）possible 不能用人做主语。possible 常用于下列句型：

It is possible to do sth. It is possible for sb. to do sth.

It is possible that … eg:

Is it possible to say so?可能这样说吗？

It is possible for me to do it. 我可能做那件事。

（3）probable 也不能用人做主语。一般只用于下面句型中：

It is probable that … eg:

It is probable that he will come. 他很可能要来。

（4）likely 既可用人作主语，也可用物做主语。通可用于“It is likely that …”句型中。 eg:

He is likely to come. = It is likely that he will come. 他可能要来。但不能说：It is likely for him to come.

（5）impossible, improbable, unlikely 用法与上述类似。

2．catch, grasp, seize 与snatch

catch是普通用语，用“设法抓住，捉住”的意思； grasp表示牢牢地“抓住”；seize指“突然用力抓住使不逃脱”；snatch 表示迅速的拉扯动作、出其不意地“抓取”。 eg:

The police caught the thief as he ran. 小偷逃跑时被警察抓住了。

He grasped his gun and rushed out. 他抓起枪就冲了出去。

He seized the gun from the enemy soldier. 他从敌人士兵手中夺过了枪。

The thief snatched her handbag and ran off. 小偷抢走了她的手提包就跑了。

知识点补充

1．Whatever great achievements the future may have in store for China, it is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing. 无论中国将来会有什么样的成就，其中许多可能就诞生在北京的西北部。

（1）in store 就要到来，必将发生 eg:

Who knows what the future has in store for us? 谁知道我们将来注定如何？

（2）in store 也有储存着，备用的意思 eg:

The runner kept some energy in store for spurting at the end. 那名赛跑的人为最后冲刺贮存精力。

2． Zhongguancun was set up as a special economic zone in the late 1990s and quickly became the leader of China’s hi-tech industry. 在20世界90年代末中关村作为高新科技特区被创立并迅速成为中国高科技工业的先锋。

（1）set up-establish 建立 eg:

The government has set up a working party to look into the problem. 政府成立工作组调查此问题。

（2）in the late 1990s 又可写成in the late 1990’s 二十世纪九十年代末

in the early 1980s 二十世纪八十年代初

（3）hi-tech= high technology 高科技，高技术

3． When I got my master’s degree, I wanted to return home but couldn’t find a company where I could use what I had learnt. 当我获得硕士学位时，我想回到家乡，可是我没能找到学有所用的公司。

（1）本句是一个复合句。When I got my master’s degree 为时间状语从句，修饰主句谓语动词wanted。wanted和couldn’t find为并列谓语动词，由并列连词but连接。where I could use what I had learnt为定语从句，修饰先行词company。what I had learnt 为宾语从句。

（2）a master’s degree 硕士学位 a doctor’s degree 博士学位a bachelor’s degree 学士学位

又如：Master of Arts 文学硕士 Doctor of Law 法学博士Bachelor of Science 理学学士

4．I will never forget how happy I was when I set foot in China again and was back with my friends and family. 我永远不会忘记当再次踏上中国土地和我的朋友及亲人团聚时，那种感觉有多幸福。

（1）本句是复合句。How happy I was …为宾语从句。when I set foot in China again and was back with … 为时间状语从句。

（2）set foot in/on 进入，踏进 eg:

She said she wouldn’t set foot in the room until it had been properly cleaned.

她说直到这屋子收拾好了她才住进去。

No man has ever set foot on that deserted island. 没有人曾光顾过那个荒芜的岛。

5． “Relying on science, technology, and knowledge to increase economic power”- makes it clear that science and business can and must work together to build the future. “依靠科学，技术，知识发展经常”，它阐明了科学和商业能够且必须结合在一起共创未来。

（1）此句为复合句。it为形式宾语，代表that引导的宾语从句。

（2）rely on/upon信赖，依赖 eg: He can always be relied upon or help. 他的帮助是永远可依赖的。

You may rely on my early arrival. 你放心好了，我会早到的。

（3）make…clear 表明，讲清楚 eg:

Have I made myself clear? 我讲清楚了吗？

They wanted to make it clear that they did an important and necessary job. 他们想说明他们做着一项重要且必要的工作。

6． …but we are excited about all the new technology and great ideas that are coming to life in Zhongguanzun. 但是我们为所有这些在中关村富有活力的新技术和卓越的想法而感到激动。

（1）that are coming to life in Zhongguancun 为定语从句，修饰先行词ideas。

（2）come to life 苏醒；恢复生气 eg:

We all thought he was drowned, but after an hour’s artificial respiration he came back to life.

我们都以为他淹死了，但经过一小时的人工呼吸后，他又苏醒了。

When I told the students the good news, they all came to life.

当我告诉学生们这个好消息时，他们都活跃起来了。

典型病句诊断

1．病句：Yufang has come to China for three years.

诊断：Yufang has been in China for three years.

点拨：come为终止性动词，用于现在完成时时态，不能与表一段时间的状语连用。

2．病句：Where has he gone is to be found out.

诊断：Where he has gone is to be found out.

点拨：主语从句应用陈述句语序。

3．病句：When I got my master’s degree, I wanted to return back to China.

诊断：When I got my master’s degree, I wanted to return to China.

点拨：return意思是“come back”，不与back连用。

4．病句：I would rather you tell me the truth.

诊断：I would rather you told me the truth.

点拨：would rather 后面带的宾语从句表示一种愿望，动词要用过去式来表示虚拟语气。

5．病句：The old man stays very health.

诊断：The old man stays very healthy.

点拨：stay为系动词，意为“保持（状态）”，后用形容词作表语。

6．病句：Great changes have been taken place in China.

诊断：Great changes have taken place in China.

点拨：take place “发生，举行”，不用被动语态。

7．病句：This lesson is more easier than that one.

诊断：This lesson is much easier than that one.

点拨：形容词比较级前不可用more, 而可以用much, even, still, a great deal, a lot, far等加强语气。

8．病句：All the answers are not correct. I can’t find one correct answer.

诊断：None of the answers are correct. I can’t find one correct answer.

点拨：all…not和not all…表示部分否定，意为“并非都……”，而none表示全部否定，意为“都不……”。

9．病句：I don’t like the way which you speak to me.

诊断：I don’t like the way that you speak to me.

点拨：在way后面引导定语从句时，可用that, in which 或省略。

10．病句：Zhongguancun has had a positive affect on business as well as science.

诊断：Zhongguancun has had a positive effect on business as well as science.

点拨：affect vt. “影响”； effect n. “影响”，have a good/bad effect on 意为“对……有好/不良的影响”。

典型例题精析

<1>Chinese arts have won the ________ of a lot of people outside China.

A.enjoyment B.appreciation

C.entertainment D.reputation

解析：enjoyment意为“快乐，高兴”；appreciation意为“欣赏”；entertainment意为“招待，对待”；reputation意为“名誉，名声”，根据句意来看选B项。答案：B

<2>The environmentalists said wild goats, ________ on the vast grasslands was a good phenomenon of the better environment.

A.escape B.absence

C.attendance D.appearance

解析：该题也是一个词汇辨析题，同时也考查构词法知识。escape意为“逃跑，避免”，absence意为“缺席”，attendance意为“到场、出席，护理、照料”，这三个词都与句意不相符，只有appearance“出现”符合题意。答案：D

<3>Mr. Smith used to smoke ________ but he has given it up now.

A.seriously B.heavily

C.badly D.hardly

解析：该题考查词义辨析、动词搭配和构词法知识。从词义上看，hardly为频度副词，要放在谓语动词的前面，首先应将D选项排除掉。另外三个词均为方式副词，虽然都可以置于不及物动词之后，但含义搭配各不相同。只有heavily习惯上与 “drink, smoke, rain, snow” 等动词搭配。故B为正确选项。答案：B

思路开拓

1.(高考全国卷Ⅰ)Sarah, hurry up. I’m afraid you can’t have time to before the party.

A.get changed B.get change C.get changing D.get to change

解析：本题考查get的用法。题意是“萨拉，快点吧!恐怕在宴会前你没时间换衣服”。get可用作系动词，后接过去分词，表示被动语态，如：get lost“迷路”，get dressed“穿上衣服”，get injured“受伤”，get paid“领取工资”等。此处get changed意为“换衣服”。答案为A。又如本单元课文中的一句话：The centre itself got started in the early 1980s, when Chen Chunxian, a researcher at the Chinese Academy of Sciences, opened a private research and development institute.答案：A

2.(20高考湖南卷)I work in a business almost everyone is waiting for a great chance.

A.how B.which C.where D.that

解析：本题考查定语从句。题意是“我在一家公司上班，在这里几乎每个人都在等待着飞黄腾达的机会”。句中almost everyone is waiting for a great chance是一个定语从句，修饰前面的先行词business。由句子的结构可知，business在定语从句中应是作地点状语，即almost everyone is waiting for a great chance in the business，故引导词要用关系副词where。答案为C。又如本单元课文中的一句话：I want to return home but couldn’t find a company where I could use what I had learnt.答案：C

3.(年高考北京卷)Now that she is out of a job, Lucy going back to school, but she hasn’t decided yet.

A.had considered B.has been considering

C.considered D.is going to consider

解析：本题考查动词的时态区别。从题干中的is和hasn’t decided两个动作来看，句子用的是现在时态，根据时态一致原则，可先排除A、C两项。题意是“露西失业了，她一直在考虑回去上学，但还没有最终决定”。可知应用现在完成进行时，表示一段时间以来一直在做某事。故答案为B。又如本单元课文中的一句话：Since the early 1990s, China has been enjoying a boom in scientific and technology development. 答案：B

4.(2004年上海春招)Suddenly, a tall man driving a golden carriage the girl and took her away, into the woods.

A.seizing;disappeared B.seized;disappeared

C.seizing;disappearing D.seized;disappearing

解析：本题考查识别句子结构的能力以及非谓语动词的用法。题意为“突然，一个驾驶着一辆金色马车的男人抢走了那个女孩，之后消失在那片树林里”。句子的主语是a tall man；driving a golden carriage是分词短语作定语；句中的and连接的是谓语动词seized和took；因为逗号不能起连接作用，故第二个空白处的动词与前面的seized和took不是并列的谓语动词，而应是作结果状语；因为disappear与man是主动关系，故用其现在分词形式作状语。答案为D。又如本单元课文中的一句话：In , Chinese scientists announced that they had completed mapping out their part of the international human genome project, proving that Chinese scientists are among the world’s best.答案：D

5.(高考上海卷)The discovery of new evidence led to .

A.the thief having caught B.catching the thief

C.the thief being caught D.the thief to be caught

解析：本题考查动词短语lead to的用法。lead to意为“导致，引起”，其中to是介词，后接名词或动名词。题意是“新证据的发现导致了那个贼的被捉”。显然，catch与the thief之间是被动关系，故要用动名词的被动式。答案为C。又如本单元中的一句话：The programme was started in March 1986 and has led to several breakthroughs in science and technology.答案：C

能力提升

§6.1 单项填空

1.The theory by Einstein was later to prove true, but at that time few people could accept it.

A.put out B.put together C.put aside D.put forward

解析：“爱因斯坦提出的理论”。put out“扑灭”；put together“组合；整理”；put aside“搁置；存放”；put forward“提出；推荐”。答案：D

2.I don’t think Jack is a man to be when we are in trouble and need his help.

A.hoped for B.related to C.expected from D.relied on

解析：“杰克是一个不可靠的人”。rely on“依靠；信赖”。答案：D

3.An earthquake shook the city last night and hundreds of houses .

A.got to damage B.got damaged C.got damage D.got damaging

解析：“get+done”是被动语态的一种形式，get damaged意为“被毁坏”。答案：B

4.Later, I wanted to return home but couldn’t find a company I could use I had learnt.

A.that;what B.when;what C.where;what D.where;that

解析：“在公司里我可以使用我所学的知识”。where引导定语从句；what引导宾语从句。答案：C

5.Mr.White is now in Beijing and runs a company in Zhongguancun together with some Chinese friends.

A.to base B.basing C.to be based D.based

解析：公司坐落在中关村，即以中关村为基地，用过去分词based作定语，相当于which is based。答案：D

6.The earliest influences upon children will most likely have the strongest effects their personalities.

A.toward B.on C.over D.for

解析：have effect on/upon是固定搭配，意为“对……有影响”。答案：B

7.Now there is just one point I wish you to make quite clear.

A.where B.which C.whether D.when

解析：point在后面的定语从句中作make的宾语，故引导词用which。答案：B

8.Just as the doctor , your wife is not exactly fat, but rather well-built for her age.

A.gets it B.makes it C.puts it D.means it

解析：get it“明白了，知道了”；make it“到达；成功”；put it“说，表达”；mean it“说话算数”。答案：C

9.They say the recorder costs 150 dollars. But I don’t think it’s worth much.

A.that B.as C.even D.rather

解析：“不值那么多钱”，用that much，此时that相当于so。答案：A

10.When I mentioned our plans for a trip abroad, the kids life at once.

A.came to B.got to C.return to D.went to

解析：come to life是固定短语，意为“变得活跃起来”。答案：A

11.He got full marks in this math exam, that he was among the class’ best.

A.to prove B.proved C.having proved D.proving

解析：此处用现在分词作结果状语，相当于and proved。答案：D

12.Firemen said the fire wasunder control, but they warned that the change in the weather might new fires.

A.lead to B.bring in C.result from D.break out

解析：天气的变化可能引起新的火灾。lead to“引起，导致”；bring in“引进，赚钱”；result from“起因于”；break out“爆发，发生”，是不及物动词短语。答案：A

13. great progress we have made, we should not be conceited.

A.However B.How C.Whatever D.What

解析：whatever引导让步状语从句，相当于no matter what。因progress是名词，故前面不能用however。

答案：C

14.He is the only one of the students who a winner of scholarship for three years.

A.is B.are C.have been D.has been

解析：此处定语从句修饰the only one，故从句中的谓语动词用单数形式。答案：D

15.The success you have achieved today may be for your whole future.

A.accessible B.significant C.temporary D.challenging

解析：你今天取得的成功或许对你整个人生都很重要。accessible“可使用的”；significant“重要的”；temporary“暂时的”；challenging“具有挑战性的”。答案：B

课文译文

中关村

不管中国将来会创造出多么伟大的成就，他们很有可能就诞生在北京的西北部。中关村，在北京海淀区，是中国科技的新中心。它是中科院以及北京大学、清华大学等十几所著名高校的所在地。

中关村在20世纪90年代末的时候才建为一个特别经济区，但很快就成了中国高新技术工业的领导力量。该中心本身创办于20世纪80年代初，中科院研究员陈春贤首先在此开办了一家私人研究发展学院。在接下来的里，大约有一百多家科技公司搬到这个地区来，这样，新的科技中心围绕着当初的中关村花园发展起来了。他们都有自己的特色，但他们也都有共同点，即:使得中关村成为一个成功典范的创新精神和科学技术。

中关村也拥有一批人数正在逐年增长的海外归来的学子，他们抓住机会来实现他们的愿望。项余方就是在海外学习工作后归国的学子之一。中关村实现了利用自己所学为国效力的梦想。

“我在国外求学是因为我想多看一看世界，能和我所研究领域的顶级科学家们一起工作。在国外，我从没感到很舒适，我想念在中国的一切。获得硕士学位的时候，我想回国，但苦于找不到一家公司施展我的才学。我在国外工作了几年，后来我听说了中关村，我知道它很适合我。”

项余方和几个在北京的大学同学说了这事，他们安排他回国。他辞去了在外国公司的工作，回到了北京。

“我非常高兴，太棒了，就像一个梦想实现了一样。我能做我想做的并且能为国家作贡献的事情了，我将永远不会忘记当我第一脚踏上中国的土地，再次见到我的朋友和家人时我是多么的兴奋！”

余方现在已在中国四年了，做得很棒。他住在北京，和两个朋友以中关村为基地开办了一家小公司。

中关村不仅对商业，对科学也有积极的影响。现在，中关村大约有八千多家高新技术公司，其中一半以上与IT（信息技术）产业有关。该园里也有中国电脑产业巨头“联想”和“方正”以及20多家知名国际公司。中关村的著名格言之一“依靠科学、技术、知识来增强经济实力”，说明科学和商业能够并且一定要联合在一起共建未来。另外一句格言帮我们解释该园的成功秘诀:“鼓励创造性工作，接受失败”。伟大的科学成就都是多年失败的结晶，多年的尝试创造以前从未存在的东西。

中关村的科学研究人员都知道，如果他们勇于面对失败，并且从失败中学习，他们就能够达到顶峰。不是所有的公司都能成功的，但他们所代表的创造精神是比金钱都还重要的。正如余方所说:“我们还没有挣很多钱，但对于中关村所激活的新技术和伟大的想法我们激动不已”。

综合技能

火热的成就

中国的历史充满了科技方面的伟大成就。自从20世纪90年代以来，中国的科技迅猛发展。中国政府提出“科技兴国”战略；在科技方面已经获得了许多重大突破。结果是显而易见的。

空间探索

CSA，中国航天部，已经成功地研发了长征系列火箭。这些火箭很安全，已经用来向太空发射卫星，并且准备发射我们国家第一次载人太空飞行。

探索生命奥秘

中国在利用基因技术提高农业产量方面一直都处于领先位置。最重要的成就之一就是一种能增加产量的水稻。在过去的二十年时间里，中国加入了研究人类身体的国际组织。，中国科学家宣布，他们已经成功地完成了他们那一部分的国际人类基因组测序工程，再一次证明中国科学家是全球最棒的。

电子革命

中国可以说是一眼就爱上了比特。互联网正在越来越受欢迎，一种新的宽带互联网即将问世。中国计算机工程师们研发了神威级超级计算机，运算速度，世界第48位，还研制了第一代人工智能机器人。

战胜癌魔

人类历史中第一次，科学家能创造出一种战胜癌细胞的化学元素。

知识记忆

1.significant adj.意义重大的，重要的，有意义的a significant date 一个重要的日期

It is a significant change in the system.这是制度上的重大改变。

The Olympic Games is a significant event for the country.举办奥运会是对该国具有重大意义的事件。

Penicillin was an extremely significant medical discovery.青霉素是一项极其重要的医学发现。

He gave her a significant look.他意味深长地看了她一眼。

be significant of… 意味着，表示……

His silence was significant of his displeasure.他的沉默显示了他心中的不快。

The laughter was significant of the crowd’s respect for the speaker.这笑声表示观众对演讲人的尊敬。

2.likely adj.很可能的

①sb./sth.is likely to do sth. “某人或某事可能会……”

He is likely to win.他可能会赢。

Are we likely to arrive on time?我们会按时到达吗？

It is likely to rain tonight.今晚可能下雨。

An accident is likely to happen if you are not careful enough.如不小心，你就可能出事故。

②It is likely that… “很可能会……”

Is it likely that he will arrive so late?他可能会来得很晚吗？

It is not likely that she should have said so.她不可能这么说。

adv.大概，或许，很可能；通常与most, very, quite等连用。

He will very likely pass the exam.他可能会通过考试的。

Most likely his attempt will fail.很可能他的尝试会失败。

3.private adj.私立的，私人的，非公开的

He attended a private school in town.他曾就读于城里的一所私立学校。

You can get a private doctor to operate on him.你可以找个私人医生为他做手术。

This is my private view.这是我个人的看法。

He is here on private business.他是因私事来这里的。

It’s wrong to read people’s private letters without permission.未经允许看私人信件是不对的。

I wish to have a private talk with you.我想私下与你谈谈。

in private“私下地，秘密地，不公开地”

It isn’t the sort of thing one should talk of in private.这不是那种可以私下谈论的事情。

He can be very rude in private, though in public he’s usually polite.他虽然在公共场合彬彬有礼，但私底下却很粗野。

4.grasp vt.抓住，抓牢，理解

He reached out, grasped my hand, and shook it.他伸出手，抓住我的手握了一下。

He grasped her firmly by the arm.他紧紧抓住她的手臂。

If you grasp the rope I will pull you up.你抓紧绳子，我把你拉上来。

Grasp your chances while you can.只要有可能，就要抓住你的机会。

You must grasp this opportunity to study abroad.你要抓住这次出国学习的机会。

I didn’t quite grasp what he was talking about.对他所讲的，我不太理解。

I grasped the main points of the speech.我理解了这次讲话的要点。

5.set foot in到达，进入，踏上

I left him, determined never to set foot in that house again.我离开了他，决心再也不踏进那个家门。

She had never set foot in a place as grand as this before.她以前从没到过这么大的地方。

I’ll never set foot in Tokyo again.我再也不会踏进东京一步。

6.failure n.失败[U]；失败的事或人[C]

Failure is the mother of success.失败乃成功之母。

His plans ended in failure.他的计划以失败而告终。

It was clear that the policy was a failure.很明显，那项政策失败了。

But this plan, too, can be nothing but a failure.但这项计划也只能会失败。

Gary was a failure as a football player.作为一个足球运动员，加里是个失败者。

Success comes after many failures.成功是源于很多次的失败后得来的。

7.locate vt.设置(机关、店铺等)，设立(工厂、办公室等)；确定……的位置

They decided to locate their new office in Hong Kong.他们决定在香港设立新的办事处。

We located the island on the map.我们在地图上确定那个岛的位置。

be located in/on… 坐落于……，位于……

Our school is located in the centre of the town.我们学校坐落于市镇的中心。

The country is located in the southern part of Africa.该国位于非洲南部。

8.luggage n.(总称)行李

He did not have much luggage.他没有很多行李。

You are only allowed to take one piece of hand luggage onto a plane.你只可携带一件手提行李上飞机。

They left their luggage at the station.他们把行李忘在了车站。

注：luggage是不可数名词。

9.put forward提出，建议，推荐

He had no desire to put forward his plan.他不想提出他的计划。

Are you serious in putting forward such a view?你真的要提出这种观点吗？

The theory was laughed at when it was first put forward.这个理论刚提出时，就受到了嘲笑。

We put him forward for the position of chairman.我们推举他当主席。

10.announce vt.宣布，宣告，显示

He phoned me to announce his decision.他打电话给我，宣布了他的决定。

The government announced its new economic policies.政府发布了新的经济政策。

We have announced our engagement to some friends only.我们只告知某些朋友有关我们订婚的事。

It has been announced that he will resign.他已经将辞职的消息宣布了。

He announced that he would pay his debts.他宣布他将偿还债务。

Please announce to your class that there will be no school tomorrow.请告知你们班的学生明天不上课。

A warm sunshine announces the coming of spring.温暖的阳光显示春天即将来到。

发散思维

1.rely on 依靠，依赖，信赖，指望

We may rely on his promises.我们可以信赖他的诺言。

The man is not to be relied on.这个人不可靠。

We must rely on our own efforts.我们一定要靠自己的努力。

They rely heavily on us for help.他们很依赖我们的帮助。

rely on sb.to do sth.指望某人做某事，相信某人会做某事

You can rely on Peter to do what he promises.你可以相信彼特会做他答应做的事的。

I rely on her to pay back the money.我相信她会还钱。

rely on one’s doing sth.指望某人做某事，相信某人会做某事

Don’t rely on my seeing you off.不要指望我为你送行。

We can’t rely on his coming in time.我们不能指望他会按时来到。

rely on it that… 相信……，指望……

You may rely on it that he will come to meet you.你放心好了，他会来接见你的。

2.arrange vt.安排，筹划，整理，布置

I have to arrange my affairs before going away.在走之前，我得把我的事情安排好。

Please arrange the books on the shelves.请把架子上的书整理好。

She helped me arrange the flowers.她帮助我养花。

The travel agency has arranged everything for our trips to Canada.旅行社已为我们的加拿大之行准备好一切。

arrange to do sth. 安排做某事，预定做某事

I’ve arranged to see her tomorrow morning.我安排明天上午会见她。

He arranged to meet us at the hotel at one o’clock.他预定1点到宾馆与我们见面。

arrange for 安排，准备

I have to arrange for everything.我必须准备好一切。

I’ll arrange for a car to pick you up at the airport.我会安排一辆汽车到机场去接你。

They have arranged for another man to take his place.他们已安排另一个人去接替他的位置。

篇7：Unit 12 Education 全单元教案(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)

Teaching aims:

1. Learn about education in China and other countries

2. Talk about study methods and learning styles

3. Better the students listening and writing abilities

Teaching methods

Team work learning Task-based learning

Teaching aids

The computer media system in the classroom A tape recorder

Periods One & Two

Words and expressions

Step One Greeting

Greet the students as usual.

Step Two Lead in

Read aloud all the words and expressions to make sure the students can pronounce them correctly.

Step Three Comment on the usages of the key words & expressions

( Cf the ppt files )

1. load []

n. 1.（车、船、人、畜等的）负荷；负担；载重

The truck was carrying a load of bananas. 这辆卡车装着一车香蕉。

We have to make three loads of the cargo. 我们得把货物分装三车。

2. （车辆等的）载重量

I’ve ordered two lorry-loads of sand. 我已定购了两卡车沙子。

3.（一个成员、一台机器等的）工作量，负荷

I have a fairly light teaching load this term. (教学负担相当轻)

4. （常与of连用）大量，许多 (a load of/loads of )

To the reader’s disappointment, the leading article in this issue of the

magazine is a load of rubbish.

这期杂志上的主要文章废话连篇,使读者大失所望。

v. 1. （常与up, with连用）装，装满，载满

We loaded the truck with bananas. 我们把香蕉装上卡车。

2. 装上（弹匣、胶卷）

Don’t move! The gun is loaded. 别动！这支枪是上了膛的。

workload [] n. 工作量, 工作负担

She has a very heavy workload. 她的工作负担很重。

2. strict [strikt]

adj. 1. 严格的，严厉的（规则或行为）(+with)

Our teacher is strict; we have to do what she says.

我们的老师很严格，我们不得不按她说的去做。

2. 精确的；完整的

He made a strict analysis of the experiment. (做精确的分析)

3. compulsory [] adj. 义务的；强制的；强迫的

Education is compulsory for all children in Britain between the age of five and sixteen. 在英国5岁到16岁的儿童都要接受义务教育。

4. commitment []

n. 1. 承诺

The general has repeated his commitment to holding elections as soon as possible. 将军重申了尽快进行选举的承诺。

2．责任；承担义务

I've taken on too many commitments.

我承担的义务太多了。

3．忠诚，信奉，支持

The company’s success this year would not have been possible without the commitment and dedication of the staff.

如果没有员工的奉献精神，公司今年的成功是不可能的。

5. tendency []

n. 1. 倾向；趋势 ① (+to, towards)

There is an increasing tendency towards the use of firearms by criminals. 罪犯使用枪械的趋势在上升。

② （＋to v. ）

There is a growing tendency for people to work at home instead of in offices.

人们在家里而不是在办公室工作的趋势日益增长。

2．癖好，秉性 ①（+to, towards）

He’s always had a tendency to /towards frivolity. 他向来表现出轻浮的倾向。

② （＋to v. ）

The teacher criticized his tendency to view world affairs purely in terms of the East-West conflicts.

老师批评了他那种单纯从东西方冲突的角度去观察国际事务的倾向。

6. expand []

vi.&vt. 1. 扩大，膨胀

The business has expanded from having one office to having twelve.

这个公司已从一个分公司发展到拥有12个分公司了。

2. 详述（故事，论证等）, 引申

I don’t quite follow your reasoning. Can you expand (on it)?

我不大理解你的论断，你能详细地加以说明吗？

You’ll have to expand your argument if you want to convince me.

你如果想使我信服，就必须详述你的论点。

3．Vi. （人）变得更友善更健谈

He expanded a little when he had had a drink, and started to talk more freely. 他喝了一杯酒，变得更友善，并开始畅谈起来。

7. distribute []

vt. 1. 分发，分配某事物 (+sth. to/among sb./sth.)

The demonstrators distributed leaflets to passers-by. 示威向行人分发传单。

2．使（某事物）散开，散布

Baggage loaded onto an aircraft must be evenly distributed.

飞机载运的行李应均匀放置在各个部位。

拓展：distribution

n. 1. 分发，分配（多作不可数名词）

The boys complained that the distribution of prizes was unfair.

男孩们抱怨奖品分配不均。

2．分布，散布（多作不可数名词）

The pine-tree has a very wide distribution. 松树的分布很广。

8. corporation []

n. 1. 公司；企业

John works for a large American chemical corporation.

约翰为一家美国大化学公司工作。

2. 市政府

The corporation has decided that no heavy-duty trucks are permitted to pass through the centre of the city during rush hours.

市政当局决定高峰期间不允许载重卡车通过市中心。

拓展：corporate []

adj.1. 社团的；团体的

corporate responsibility, action, etc 共同的责任，行动等

2．市政府的；公司的

Corporate executives usually have high salaries.

公司里的管理人员一般享有高薪。

9. donate []

vt. 捐赠；赠送

The businessman donated a lot of money to the hospital.

这个商人捐给医院很多钱。

拓展：donation [] n. 捐赠；捐赠品；捐款

She made a donation of $ 1,000 to the Children’s Hospital.

她捐了1,000 美元给儿童医院。

10. ministry []

n [C] 1. （政府的）部

My brother works in the Ministry of National Defense.

我弟弟在国防部工作。

2. the ministry [GP] 神职界；（全体）牧师

His parents intended him for the ministry. 他的父母有意让他当牧师。

11. aspect []

n. 1. 方面 He mentioned only one aspect of the problem.

他只提到问题的一个方面。

2. 容貌，表情

He was serious of aspect but wholly undistinguished.

他面色严峻，却不过一庸人而已.

3. ( 房屋、门窗等的）朝向

She prefers a house with a southern aspect.

她喜欢朝南的房子。

12. profession []

1. 专业，职业（尤指受过专门训练的，如法律、教学等）

He is a lawyer by profession.

他是职业律师。

2. 信仰或信念的表白

His profession of concern did not seem sincere.

他所表示的关心看来并非出自内心。

拓展：professional adj. []

adj.1. 从事专门职业的 2. 职业的，专业的

A lawyer is a professional man. 律师是从事专门职业的人。

For professional footballers, injuries are an occupational hazard.

对于职业足球运动员来说,受伤是职业本身带来的危险。

13. alongside []

1. prep 在…旁边；与…并排

The car drew up alongside the kerb. 小汽车在路边停下来。

2. adv. 横靠着；沿着；傍着

We brought our boat alongside. 我们把船靠边。

14. advocate []

1.vt. 拥护；提倡；主张

He advocates building more schools. 他主张多建几所学校。

2. n.（常与of连用）拥护者；提倡者

I am not a strong advocate of “English only” in the reading class.

对于阅读课上只用英语，我不是个强烈的拥护者。

15. obtain []

vt., vi. 得到，获得

I haven't been able to obtain that book. 我还没能得到那本书。

辨析：get, obtain, acquire, gain, win, earn

这组动词的一般含义是“得到”。

obtain包含着“努力”、“希望”或“决意”去获得某物的意思。

The journalist immediately set out to obtain these important facts.

那位新闻记者立即着手获取这些重要的资料。

Ordinary people would then be able to use them to obtain valuable information.

那时平常的人便能运用它们去获取宝贵的信息。

get是最普遍、使用范围最广的词

I sat in the front of the bus to get a good view of the countryside.

我坐在公共汽车的前部，以得到有利于观赏农村风光的机会。

acquire虽然含有“努力获得”的意思，但更强调在原来的基础上自然增长或新的增添。

After having been instructed to drive out of town, I began to acquire confidence.

接到把车开出城的指令后，我的信心增长了。

gain有obtain的含义，但更强调目的物需要努力奋斗才能得到，而且这种东西具有价值，特别是物质价值。

During that time, she so gained my aunt's confidence that she was put in charge of the domestic staff.

在这期间，她得到了我姑姑如此的信任，结果被委任为家仆的负责人。

A penny saved is a penny gained. 省一文是一文。(谚语)

win虽然常常可以和gain换用，但win具有gain所不能表达的含义。如：获得者具有有利的品质

It seemed certain that this would win the prize.

这一块会得奖，这似乎是肯定的了。

This invariably wins them the love and respect of others.

这种行为常常为他们赢得别人的爱戴和尊敬。

earn包含着获得物与所花的气力是相互成比例的

His achievements earned him respect and admiration.

他的成就为他赢得别人的尊敬和赞美。

Some of them have come home for a few days' hard-earned leave.

他们中的有些人已经回国，度过那得之不易的几天假日。

16. evident [] adj.明显的

It's evident that you are tired. 显然你累了。

辨析：evident, obvious, clear, plain

这组形容词都有“清楚的”或“明显的”意思。

evident在善于修辞的作者笔下，总包含一定的迹象。

It's evident that someone has been here.

显然有人来过这里。

obvious所表示的“明显的”强调容易发现，常常用于修饰或说明那些本想掩盖而又没有能掩盖彻底的事情

The rope had been cut, so it was obvious that the lamb had been stolen.

绳子是被割断的，因此这只羊羔显然是被偷去的。

注：此句中的obvious 换用evident则更确切。

He is the stereotyped monster of the horror films and the adventure books, and an obvious (though not perhaps strictly scientific) link with our ancestral past.

它们是恐怖电影和惊险小说中的老一套的怪物，并且与我们的祖先有着明显的(虽然可能没有科学的) 联系。

clear(以及常见的plain)是口语中常用词，其含义为“清楚易懂”。clear 除了“清楚的”，“清晰的”之外，还有许多其他含义。如“流畅的”，“无障碍的”等。

The water of the lake is as clear as glass.

湖水清彻如同明镜。

He gave a clear answer to the direct question.

他对那个直截了当的问题作了清晰的答复。

plain除了“清楚的”、“浅显的”之外，也有些别的含义。如：a plain face(一个普通的或不漂亮的面孔)

The letter was written in plain English.

那封信是用浅显的英语写的。

17. select []

1. vt. 挑选，选择；择优 (select sb./sth. as sth. )

I was selected for the team.

我被选入这个队。

2. adj.挑选的，精选的, 择优的

a select group of top scientists 最优秀科学家小组

a film shown to a select audience 给内部观众反映的影片

辨析：choose， select， elect， pick

这些动词都指从一些可能性中做出选择。

Choose含有运用判断力在一些人、物或行为方式中选出一个的意思。

We do not choose survival as a value; it chooses us。

并不是我们把生存作为一种价值而选择了它；而是它选择了我们。

Select侧重于从许多不同种类中进行选择时的挑剔态度。

Four skiers will be selected to represent each country.

每个国家将选出四名滑雪者作为代表。

Elect强烈地暗示着通常在两者之间作出挑选时的深思细想。

I elected not to go.

我决定不去。

Pick和select 一样，表示选择时的小心谨慎。

I picked a book to read. 我选了一本书读。

18. suit [su:t, sju:t]

vt.1. 满足；取悦；适意；对…方便

It suits me if you come to work at eight o'clock.

如果你八点来上班我就满意了。

2. 适合，适当

That dress suits you. 那套衣服你穿起来挺合适。

n. 1. n. 一套衣服，套装

a business suit 一套西装

2. 诉讼

He is suiting for divorce. 他向法院提出要求离婚。

19. restriction []

n. 限制；约束

There is a restriction against smoking in schools. 禁止在学校吸烟。

拓展：restrict []

vt. 限制；限定

He restricts himself to two cigarettes a day.

他限制自己每天吸两支香烟。

schedule []

n. 时间表；进度表；程序表

The next thing on our schedule is to telephone our friends.

我们的日程安排中要做的下一件事是给我们的朋友打电话。

20. presentation []

n. 1. [U] 赠送，引见，提出，出席，演出

They are preparing for the presentation of a new musical.

他们正准备上演新的歌舞喜剧。

2. [U] 赠送，引见，提出，出席，演出等的方式

She needs to improve her presentation of the arguments.

她需要改进阐述其论点的方式。

3. [C] 所赠送，引见，提出，出席，演出的事物，赠品，礼物,（尤指经仪式）授予之物

We went to the premiere of their new presentation.

我们去观看了他们的新剧目的首场演出。

The queen will make the presentation herself. 女王将亲自授予礼品。

拓展：present

adj. []

1. 出席的；到场的

How many people were present at the meeting? 会议有多少人出席？

2. 现在的；现存的

What is your present job? 你现在的工作是什么？

vt. []

1. 赠予；颁予

They presented flowers to their teacher. 他们献花给老师。

The mayor presented a silver cup to the winner. 市长把银杯授予了获胜者。

2.提出；呈递

The committee is presenting its investigation report next week.

委员会将于下星期提出调查报告。

The baker presented his bill. 面包师呈上帐单。

3. 表示；呈现

He presented his apologies. 他表示道歉。

4. 演出；公演

The theatre company is presenting 'Romeo and Julia' by Shakespeare next week.

剧团下星期将演出莎剧'罗密欧和朱丽叶'。

5. 介绍；引见；举荐

May I present Mr Robinson to you? 可否让我向你介绍罗宾逊先生?

The new ambassador was presented to the president. 新大使被引见给总统。

6. 展现

He always presents a calm smiling face. 他总是展现出平和的微笑。

7. 表现；造成

Money presents no difficulty to them. 资金对他们来说不成问题。

Step Four Homework

Ex 1 Page 105

Period 3 Let’s listen and speak!

Goals

Talk about education in China and other countries.

Talk about some great educators in China and other countries.

Compare education in China and other countries.

Talk about the achievements and problems in education in China.

Procedures

Step 1 Lead in

(1) by discussion.( pair work, approx. 5 mins.)

T: Hi, everyone. Today we’re going to talk about education and some great educators in China and in other countries. Do you know any great educators?

(Give Ss 3 mins to discuss it in pairs, then present their results to the whole class. )

Leading in(2) by warming up (group work, approx. 10 mins.)

Hello, boys and girls. Look at the pictures in the warming up part on page 100, and think about the following questions.

(1) The educators in the pictures are all famous. When did they live and where did they come from?

(2) Do you know how they taught their students? How was it different from your own education?

(3) Write down what you know about the four educators in the chart on the next page and then report to the class.

Educator Time Country Way of teaching

Confucius Spring and Autumn Period in Chinese history China with the principles of good conduct, practical wisdom, and proper social relationships

Anton Makarenko 1888–1939 Russia His theories emphasized the importance of physical labor, discipline, and the collective in education.

Anne Sullivan 1866-1936 the USA a special educator

show love and patience to students

Tao Xingzhi 1891-1946 China The theory of “Life Education”

He proposed “unity of teaching, learning, and reflective acting.”

He believed that one should do first, then one will know.

(For Ss’ limited knowledge, teachers can show the following information.)

Step 2 Listening

Say to Ss: The four educators made great contributions to the young students’ education. And we know that education is of great importance to a country. The education in China has been improved a lot. But there are still a lot for us to do and to be learned from other countries. Next let’s listen to two students comparing education in China and the USA.

1. Before you listen to the tape, think about the following questions.

(1) What do you know about education in the United States?

(2) How is it similar to Chinese education? How is it different?

2. Before you listen to the tape, please go through the chat below.

3.Now let’s listen to the tape and make notes under each heading in pairs.

Comparison of education in China and the USA

Class size

Method of teaching/Teaching style

Homework

Exams

4. After the first listening, encourage the Ss to say what they’ve got from the tape and collect them on the blackboard.

5. Listen to the tape for the second time for details. Help Ss to finish the chart.

6. To make the students understand the passage better, let them listen to the tape for the last time.

Step 3 Speaking

T: We should say that education is very important to a country. To our great joy, education in China has made great improvement. Now please look at the graphs on pages 101 to 102 and discuss the following questions. Before you discuss them, let’s go through some words and phrases.

statistics: (used with a pl. verb)Numerical data.

（与复数动词连用）统计数据

graph: A diagram that exhibits a relationship, often functional, between two sets of numbers as a set of points having coordinates determined by the relationship.

曲线图；座标图；图解

bar graph [统]条线图

line graph [数]线图

Now please look at the two graphs on page 102 and discuss the questions on the right in a group of four.

Good, you’ve got a good idea about education in China. With the results you have got, please talk about the achievements, progress and problems in education in China. The following words and phrases may be useful for your discussion.

a heavy workload

to reduce the workload

to meet parents’ expectation

to be strict with

to raise academic standards

under high pressure

Step 4 Homework

1. Ask the students to collect more information about the four famous educators: Confucius, Anton Makarenco, Anna Sullivan, Tao Xingzhi.

2. Ask the students to collect some information about the education in the city/province.

3. Ask the students to list all the equipment, people and plans that are needed to run a school.

Period 4 Education for all

Goals

◆ Provide students with the goal “Education for all” and the present situation of education in China and other countries.

◆ Improve students’ ability of reading comprehension.

Procedures

Step 1 Leading in

1. Talk about the education in the city or province.

2. Talk about the equipment, people and plans that are needed to run a school.

Conclusion: We are lucky enough to have quite good education in our city. But there are many children who don’ t have the chance to go to school because of various reasons. In China we have the “Hope Project” that helps many children who are unable to go to school. And also there is a project named “Education for all”. Today we’ll talk about “Education for all”.

3．Discussion

What is needed to set up a school? Cf. ppt. files on the screen

Step 2 Reading for general ideas

Ask students to read the passage “Education for all” and match the best heading for each paragraph in the text.

Suggested answers:

B Education for all children worldwide will be difficult to achieve

D Solving the problem of teaching quality in remote areas

A Compulsory education for all Chinese children

F Problems of number and location

C Encouraging people in rural areas to accept education

E Meeting the cost

G Education for All---an international target

Main idea of the text

The passage makes it clear to us that Education for all is closely linked to the development of a country. To achieve the target, many measures should be taken, such as making poor traditional village people attach enough importance to education, dealing with the shortage of teachers by having mixed-grade classes, solving financial problems and improving teaching quality in rural areas by adopting distance learning.

Step 3 Reading comprehension

Task A Choose the best answer

1. According to the text, ______ of school-age children had attended primary school by _____. C

A. 99 %; B. 86%; 2000

C. 99%; 2004 D. 86%; 2004

2. What suggests that many countries realize the importance of education? C

A. They realize that the future welfare of their citizens is closely linked to education.

B. They attended the World Education Forum in 2000.

C. At the World Education Forum in 2000, they made a commitment called “Education for all”.

D. They are trying to get every child into school.

3. ______ prevents some people attaching importance to education. D

A. The importance of agriculture

B. Heavy work on the farm

C. Traditional ideas

D. All the above

4. What kind of classes can often be seen in western provinces in China? A

A. Mixed grade classes

B. Classes of large sizes

C. Classes of small sizes

D. Classes by two-way radio and mail

5. What measures do many developing countries take to provide schools with necessary equipment? B

A. They call on their citizens to donate it

B. They depend on aid from other countries and international organizations or programs

C. They borrow it from their neighbor countries

D. Developed provinces provide aid for less developed provinces

6. How many countries and regions are mentioned in the text to have adopted distance learning methods? A

A. 3 B. 4 C. 5 D. 6

7. According to Paragraph F, which of the following is one of the education problems existing in America? C

A. The quality of teaching is not good nationwide

B. There are too many families now below poverty line

C. One third of the students live in the countryside

D. Violent crimes take place in schoolyards

8. The text talks mainly about _____. A

A. “Education for all ”-- the international target

B. solving the problems of teaching quality in remote areas

C. encouraging people in rural areas to accept education

D. problems of the number of people in one area and location

9. It’s difficult for some countries in Africa and Asia to achieve the goal of “Education for all”, because _______. D

A. the population is too large

B. they are facing many other problems, such as lack of fresh water and basic health care

C. the international aid is far from enough

D. the economy there is the least developed

10. Which of the statements is true? B

A. People’s attitude towards education don’t affect education system

B. The population in one area and people’s distribution can also cause education problems

C. Education system can be affected by students

D. All the above

Task B Complete the forms

Problems & Solutions

Problems Solutions

Parents unwilling to send daughters to school Create a positive attitude

Shortage of classrooms Large class sizes

Shortage of teachers Have mixed grade classes

Shortage of money From international and local organization

Far away from the school Distance learning

Task C Learn the useful expressions from EDUCATION FOR ALL

compulsory education, the future welfare, the World Education Forum, the member countries, to make a commitment, get…into…, to begin with, a positive attitude, play a/an…role, to attach importance to…, be skeptical of…, drop out, be distributed, the remote central and western provinces, spread out, by two-way radio and mail, rely on, non-governmental organizations, to donate sth., provide…with…, to adopt distance learning method, computerized teaching networks, to overcome…, to accomplish…, a huge task.

Step 4 Further understanding of the passage

Ask students to do the task 2 on page 104.

Well, class, please go through the sentences on task 2 on page 104 and try to find out the mistakes in each sentence.

In order to achieve the goal of “education for all”, different countries use different ways to solve their own problems. Try to find out which countries use the following methods to help them provide education.

Distance learning, mixed-grade classes, money from international organizations, money from local organizations.

Now please discuss in a group of four if there are any ways in which education in your area could be improved and which you think is the most important aspect to change.

Step 5 Homework

1. review the passage: Education for all

2. Finish the exercises in “Language study” part.

Period 5 How we learn

Goals

1. Read about the study tips.

2. Talk about the way you learn.

Teaching procedures

Step 1: Listening and reading aloud.

Hello, boys and girls, you have been a student for some years. Have you found a good way to carry out your study. Today we’ll read a passage named “How we learn”. First read aloud to the recording of the text HOW WE LEARN on page107. Pay attention to the pauses, the pronunciation and the intonation while listening and reading aloud.

Post-reading questions:

1. Why do students learn in different ways?

2. What are the three basic learning styles?

3. What is the limitation of teachers’ teaching in classrooms?

Suggested answers:

1. Because different people have different ways of obtaining information and use various methods to demonstrate their intelligence and ability.

They are: learning through seeing; learning through listening and learning through doing.

2. Restrictions of time, space and resources often make it impossible for teachers to provide the best exercises for all learners.

Step 2: Reading

Task A Read the text to complete the following chart.

Type of writing This is a piece of descriptive writing

Main idea of the passage It tells about the world-wide efforts to achieve the goal of “Education for all”

Main idea of Para.1 Compulsory education for all Chinese children

Main idea of Para 2 Education for all children worldwide will be difficult to achieve

Main idea of Para 3 Encouraging people in rural areas to accept education

Main idea of Para 4 Solving the problem of teaching quality in remote areas

Main idea of Para 5 Meeting the cost

Main idea of Para 6 Problems of number and location

Main idea of Para 7 Education for All---an international target

Graphic representation of the text

Step 3. Reinforcement

Task B. Complete the sentences

1. Students are different in ___________, _______ and _____________________, yet they have a lot in common, such as the same _____ and ___________.

2. Different people have different ways to ______________ and to ____________ ________________________.

3. The three basic styles for people to learn are learning through ________, learning through __________ and learning through _________.

4. Those who learn through seeing like to see their teachers’ ________________ and ______________. They prefer to sit at the _____ of the classroom.

5. Those who like ____________ what their teachers say give close attention to both the _______ of the discussion and the _____ that things are said.

6. Those who don’t like to _______ for long or who can seldom ____________on what they are reading or listening learn through doing.

Task C. Study and learn the sentences

1. When learning something new, if you prefer to read the information, you are probably a student who learns through seeing. (Par. 3)

2. Students who find it easiest to learn a new concept by hearing …. (Par. 4)

3. Reading aloud, using a tape recorder …are the best for…. (Par. 4)

4. Learning through doing means being active in exploring the environment and finding out about things by moving and touching. (Par. 5)

Step 4. Assignment

The workbook exercises

Period 6 Reinforcement

Goals

3. Go over the key points of the unit

4. Write a composition about the education of China.

Teaching procedures

Step 1: Review the key points of the unit

1. Go over the chechpoints

2. Test your skills Cf Ex 1 Page 234

Step 2: Comment on the other exercises

Cf. the two reading materials & the close test on Page 238.

Step 3: Assignment

Writing

假如你叫王明，是二年级三班的班主任，17 岁的英国留学生玛丽在你班学习，请你根据老师们的评论用英语为其写一段评语，并填写报告书。

语文老师：她对汉语有浓厚的兴趣，而且口语很好.

数学老师：她擅长数学，每天做大量的数学练习.

化学老师：她喜欢做实验，但有时不够细心.

物理老师：物理是她最喜欢的学科，她是班里学得

最好的学生之一.

班主任：她讲礼貌、乐于助人、与师生相处融洽.

说明:

1．Profession 职业，Nationality 国籍， Comments 评语。

2．字数120字左右。

Name Profession Age

Grade Class Nationality

Class master's Comments:

Signature:

篇8：Unit 11 Key to success 全单元简案(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)

Period one Words and expressions

Teaching aims:

1. Read the new words fluently and recite the important ones.

2. Master the usages of some words and expressions.

Teaching methods

Team work learning Task-based learning

Teaching aids

The computer media system in the classroom A tape recorder

Teaching Procedures:

Step One Greeting

Greet the students as usual.

Step Two Lead in

Read aloud all the words and expressions to make sure the students can pronounce them correctly.

Step Three Comment on the usages of the key words & expressions

( Cf the ppt files )

1. stick with sb./sth.继续支持某人（某物），保持与某人（物）的联系

I’m __________ my original idea.我坚持我原来的主张。

短语回忆：

stick sth on (sth.) stick out stick to sth.

2. through thick and thin

1) 不顾艰难=in spite of all the difficulties

He remained loyal to me through thick and thin.

2) 同甘共苦，祸福与共=through both good and bad times; faithfully

She remained with her husband through thick and thin.

一个真正的朋友是会和你同甘共苦，共患难的。

A real friend is one who will stand by you _________________.

你能否与朋友祸福与共？

3. pull out of 从。。。中退出

pull out

1) 拉出，拔出 He pulled out a gun.

2)（指火车）驶离（车站） I arrived as the last train was pulling out.

3)（使某人，物）从某物中退出

The project became so expensive that we had to pull out.

What is the moment for you to pull out of a friendship?

4. reputation

He has a good reputation as a doctor.

It is a school ______________________. 这是一所享有盛誉的学校。

He has __________________ laziness/for being lazy. 他以懒惰出名。

establish / build up a reputation 树立名誉，博得名声

live up to one’s reputation 不负盛名（行为，表现等与声誉相符）

5. suspect

1)相信

What she said sounded convincing, but I suspect it to be a lie.

Most people don’t, _______, realize this.

2)怀疑

I suspect the truth of her statement.

suspect sb.(of sth/doing sth.) 怀疑某人有罪

What made you suspect her of having taken the money?

6. for the sake of 由于，为了。。。的利益

= for sb.’ sake; for the purpose sake 目的，缘故

All she has done is for the children’s sake, not her own.

_________________, he moved to the countryside.

为了求得宁静，他搬到了乡下。

7. in reality事实上，实际上=in fact; in actual fact; as a matter of fact; actually;

The house looks very old, but in reality it’s quite new.

Everyone liked the stranger, but in reality he was a criminal.

8. temporary暂时的，临时的

This arrangement is only temporary. 这只是暂时的安排。

9. keep an eye on 照料，照管

have an eye for keep an eye out for sb./sth.

1) Keep an eye on the baby while I’m away.

2) 自从那个小偷出狱，警方一直在密切地监视着他

The police ______________the thief ever since the came out of prison.

10. take……into account=take……into consideration

You must take it into account that the boy has been ill for a long time.

在准备露天游园会时，你必须考虑天气问题。

When you are planning a garden party, you will_____________________.

11. as a whole

1)作为整体

Is the collection going to be divided up or sold as a whole?

这批收藏品是零卖还是一起卖？

2)全体人民普遍拥护改革

The population _______________is / are in favour of the reform.

on the whole 总的说来，一切都考虑在内。

On the whole, I’m in favour of the proposal.

12. congratulate sb. on sth.=offer one’s congratulations to sb. on sth.

We congratulated her on having passed the exam.

congratulate oneself on sth. 庆幸自己。。。。。

Congratulated ourselves on our good luck in finding the good jobs.

13. live up to

1)遵守（诺言）；实践（原则，信仰）

He had no intention of___________________.他无意履行自己的诺言。

2)达到预期目的；不辜负（。。。。的期望）

I hope I can __________________.我希望我不会辜负父母的期望。

3)配得上；比得上；仿效

His wife was so clever that he felt that he could never live up to her.配不上

4)He found it difficult to live up to the reputation of being a hero.

他觉得做一个_____________英雄很不容易。

14. pursue

1）追求；不断努力以获得某物

He pursued fame all his life.

2）（指有害之事物）纠缠

Bad luck pursued us all through the year. 霉运这一年都缠着我们。

15. accommodate

1)提供住宿

We can ___________________a sitting-room and two bedrooms.

2)改变（自己习惯，生活方式）以适应新的情况

他试图使自己的生活方式与她的生活方式相适应。

He tried to __________________to hers.

He has accommodated himself to his new surroundings.

Step Four Homework

Read the new words fluently.

Period Two Making the team work

Teaching aims:

1. Get a general idea of the text.

2. Improve the ability of reading

Teaching methods

Team work learning

Task-based learning

Teaching aids

The computer media system in the classroom

a tape recorder

Teaching procedures:

Step 1. Fast reading and finish T or F questions

1. A team is a group of individual people brought together in order to accomplish a task that can be efficiently or effectively completely by any member of the group alone.

2. In a sports team the coach is usually counted as a team member.

3. The coach’s role is to discuss strategy but not to make decisions about the composition of the team.

4. It is not necessary for all team members to be friends, but all team members should respect each other.

5. Though in a sports team each player has a clear role, there are a few occasions when members are confused or uncertain of their roles.

6. Working in groups at school is an opportunity to learn more about teamwork.

7. Group work teaches us to be patient and how to respond to different personalities.

8. In a sports team each player has a clear role, so even in small teams, members may not .combine roles according to their personalities.

9. In a team, people with quite different personalities can’t work well together.

10. To understand means we can build strong and good relationships between members of a team, and make the best use of each other’s talents.

Step 2. Careful reading and finish the following.

§1.1细节

1. A team is______. D

A. a group of individual people brought together

B. a group of people who can accomplish a task more efficiently or effectively than any member of the group alone

C. a group of people who will stay temporarily or for a long time

D. all the above

2. In sports games, a player______. B

A. often changes his role

B. has a clear role

C. feels that players with different abilities make different contributions to the team

D. accepts the same expectations and responsibilities as the other players

3. The author takes______ for example to show how a team can work well. A

A. the sports team B. the project team

C. the rugby team D. a dynamic team

4. In order for a team to function well, people of the team must______. D

A. respect each other

B. co-operate

C. obey necessary rules and regulations

D. all the above

5. Group work at school is important to students because______. D

A. it is an opportunity to learn more about team work

B. it brings the benefit of getting experience working with others

C. it teaches us to be patient and how to respond to different personalities

D. it is a preparation for our working days to come

6. Why is it important in a team to know someone’s personality type and ability? D

A. We can know a great deal about that person.

B. Lack of recognition of differences in human function can be avoided.

C. We can build strong and good relationships between members of a team.

D. Both B and C.

§1.2主旨大意

7. What is the main idea of Paragraph 7? C

A. How a project team is different from a rugby team.

B. How a project team works.

C. In a project team, people who have different abilities and personalities have different roles in the team.

D. How the tasks of the group are divided depends on personalities and abilities of the individuals in the group.

8. In the whole text, the author mainly talks about______. A

A. the elements that make the team work

B. the importance of social relationships within a team

C. the roles that different people of a group play

D. the comparison between a project team and a rugby team

§1.3推理判断

9. According to the text, which of the following statements is not right? A

A. The coach of a sports team is not counted as a team member ,so he is less important.

B. Social relations are important within the team.

C. The atmosphere in the group affects the performance of the team.

D. It’s not necessary for all team members to be friends.

10. We can infer from the text that______. B

A. the players in a rugby team should co-operate while the people in a project team needn’t

B. the players in a rugby team have clear roles while people in a project team may not have

C. the coach of a rugby team discusses strategy and makes decisions while the leader of a project team doesn’t

D. the coach of a rugby team is important while the leader in a project team may not be as important

Step 3. Read the text again and answer the following questions.

1. Are there any conflicts about expectations and responsibilities attached to each role in a sports team?

2. What kinds of people are required in teams?

3. According to the author, what are requirements for teams to function well?

4. According to the author, some team members work best in tasks alone. Is this statement contradictory or not.

Step 4. Reinforcement

A. ask students to divide the passage into 3 parts.

part 1: Para 1-2 general introduction of team work

part 2: Para 3-6 sports teams ( rugby teams)

part 3: Para 7-10 project teams

B. further understanding

Para 1: 1. Especially at school, it sometimes feels as if we are being asked to work in teams for the sake of just that.

特别是在学校里,有时我们感觉好象是为了团体活动而组织团体活动。

Para. 3: 2. It is important that all members of the team feel that each of them makes an equal contribution and that they help and support each other.

Para. 6: 3. As with sports teams, group work can …when group members respect…, while the work division…at the right level in the role that is …

Para. 7: 4. 整个段落用了三种不同的表达方式表达类似的意思

people who… people…are the ones… some are…

Phrases:

1.stick with sb./sth.和某人/某物保持密切关系 ; 继续，坚持，保持

be stuck with sth./sb. 被…缠住 stick out 伸出，坚持到底，忍下去

stick to 坚持，尊循 stick up 竖立，向上突出

2. through thick and thin不顾艰难; 同甘共苦; 祸福与共

3. suspect sth./+clause怀疑/以为… suspect sb. to be… 怀疑/以为某人是…

suspect sb. of sth./doing sth怀疑某人做…

4. what if 倘使…将会怎样？即使…又有什么要紧 , 尽管…又有什么关系

含if的短语

only if 只有 if only要是…就好了 as if 好像

5. for the sake of=for one’s sake为了…，由于,看在…的份上

6. attach sth. to sth. 将某物系在另一物上将某物与另一物相联系

7. as with=as to =as for就…而言，至于…

8. keep an eye on=keep one’s eye on 密切注意，看守，看管，留神

一些与有关的短语

have an eye for 对…有鉴赏眼光

shut/close one’s eyes to 不理会，闭眼不见

get the eye 引人注目 catch one’s eyes 引起注意

by all eyes 聚精会神地 keep an eye out for 当心

keep an eye on 盯着

9. take into account = take into consideration= take account of

对…加以考虑, 顾及

Step 5. Homework

1. Read the text again.

2. Underline some useful phrases beforehand.

3. Ex 2 Page 96

Period 3 Making the team work

Teaching Aims:

1. Reinforce useful phrases and expressions in the passage

2. Retell the text

Teaching methods

Team work learning Task-based learning

Teaching aids

The computer media system in the classroom

Teaching procedures:

Step 1. Revision

Reminding the students of what has been learned in the previous period

Step 2. Language points (PPT Files)

1. for the sake of…..=for sb’s sake; for the purpose of

她所做的一切不是为自己，而是为了孩子们的缘故。

2. In reality/in fact/in actual fact/as a matter of fact/actually

Everyone liked the stranger, but ___________he was a criminal.

3. be familiar with sth. / be familiar to sb.

4. accomplish a task accomplish one’s aim an accomplished fact

5. count sb/sth as…=be accepted 认可, 认为……..是

I count him as a good judge of character.

We count her as one of our oldest friends.

Count on sb./sth 依赖;指望Don’t ___________a salary increase this year.

6. attach to

7. be aware of sth/that

8. keep an eye on

9. as with …….就…….而言

As with the experienced participants, you’ll want to use test tasks that are as natural as possible.

对于那些有经验的参与者来讲,你将希望采用比较自然的测试任务.

表示 “至于” 还可以用:

as for Kitty’s got so thin. And as for Carl, he always seems to be ill.

as to Henry was very uncertain as to whether it was the right job for him.

10. avoid doing sth

Step 3 Understand the following key sentences

1. What if you feel comfortable doing a task by yourself?

2. It is important that all members of the team feel that each of them makes an equal contribution and that they help and support each other.

3. Working in a team, we have to take into account how each individual member works best.

4. How the tasks of the group are divided depends on the personalities and abilities of the individuals in the group.

Step 4 Homework

Ex 1 Page 226 Readings Pages 228-230

Period 4 Integrating skills

Ticket to success

Teaching aims

1. get the general idea 2. useful phrases and expressions

Teaching methods

Team work learning Task-based learning

Teaching aids

The computer media system in the classroom A tape recorder

Teaching procedure

Step 1. Revision

Check up the home work exercises

Step 2. Reading

Read the text and answer the questions

1. Can you explain what the text is about?

2. Li yonghong made two important decisions in her life. What are they?

3. Li Yonghong may still have the ambition to become a manager.

1) Which two ways are open to high school students to reach that position?

2) Which way has Li Yonghong chosen?

Language points:

1.set up a small business

2. in mind 在脑海中

have sb/sth in mind, keep/bear sb/sth in mind, bear/keep in mind that

Bear in mind that the price does not include flights.

记住,这价格不包括机在内.

Cf: have something on one’s mind = be worried about sth.

3. Things went smoothly.

4. As the year went by, she worked in many places……..

5. put money to good use

6. prove to be

7.decide on决定某事，选定某物

8. do make-up化装

10. live up to

11.The ideal for many people at that age is to go to university, but is going to university really the ideal career for most people?

12. No matter how hard you try, working towards a career for which you are not suitable is not going to get you there.

13. make the most of

14. It is important to recognise that each personality type is of equal value.

15. Do you stick with your friends through thick and thin? What is the moment

for you to pull out of a friendship?

16. Do you prefer doing things on your own or in a group?

Step 3. Homework

Require the students to get prepared for the exercises on Pages 226-232

Period 5 Reinforcement of the unit

Ticket to success

Teaching aims

Reinforce the key points of the unit and comment on the exercises

Teaching methods

Team work learning

Teaching procedure

Step 1. Reinforce the key points of the unit

1) Read and spell the following words

1.标准；尺度 2.总结，概要 3.百分比；百分率

4.问卷；调查表 5.名声，名誉 6.同事，同僚

7.暂时的；临时的 8.合作；协作 9.预料，期待

10.妥协 11.规章，条例 12.官僚的

13.动力的，动态的 14.互相矛盾的 15.有雄心的

16.财政，金融 17.结合；混合物 18.变少，变小

2) Change the forms of the following words.

1. criterion (pl.) ________ 2.summary (v.)_________3.frequent (n.)________

4. manage(n.)___________5. require (n.)_________ 6. cooperate (n.)_______

7. certain(ant.)__________8.expect(n.)__________9.divide (n.)_________

10.excite(n.)________11.violent(n.)__________12.explore(n.)__________

13.ambitious(n.)_______14.combination(n.)______15.except(adj.)________

3) Complete the sentences.

1.I’m __________________（坚持） my original idea.

2.A real friend is one _________________________________（与你同甘共苦）

3.It is a school with an excellent ______________ (声誉)

4.I ___________（怀疑）the truth of her statement.

5._____________________, （为了求得宁静）he moved to the countryside.

6.Everyone liked the stranger, but ____________（事实上）he was a criminal.

7.This arrangement is only ___________（暂时的）

8.When you are planning a garden party, you will have to ________________（考虑天气问题）

9.The population ________________（普遍）is in favour of the reform.

10.He had no intention of ________________________（履行自己的诺言）

Step 2. Comment on the exercises

Confer all the exercises attached to the unit.

Step 3. Writing practice

假设你是学校广播台英文节目的编辑，请按照下面图画所示内容，用英文写一篇广播稿，向同学们介绍在发生禽流感疫情的情况下应采取的一些预防措施。

注意：

1. 广播稿须包括图画的主要内容,可以适当增减细节,使内容连贯；

2. 词数100左右, 开头结尾已为你写好；

3. 参考词：

禽流感

bird flu

写作要点：

1. 远离病鸡，如果与病禽接触后，要立即用肥皂洗手；

2. 不买或不吃未查检禽类动物, 高温烹制禽类食品；

3. 养成好习惯，经常开窗通风，睡好，吃好，加强锻炼。

可能用到的句子

1. Don’t go to any place where the disease has been found for sightseeing.

2. Stay away from animals such as ducks, hens, cocks, and geese.

3. Never buy food that has been affected from the market.

4. Remember to check that they are safe foods.

5. Cook chicken food at a high temperature.

6. Open the door and windows regularly to keep the air fresh.

7. Take more exercises and have a good rest everyday.

Attention, please!

Today I’d like to say something about bird flu. It is reported that bird flu has broken out in parts of the world and therefore it is very important for us to know how to protect ourselves against it. The following are some dos and don'ts suggested by experts.

Don’t go sightseeing in any place where the disease has been discovered. Stay away from animals such as ducks, hens, cocks and geese, which are most likely to get affected by the disease.

If you want to buy them from the market, do remember to check that they are safe from the disease. What's more, make sure that the food such as chicken is well cooked at a high temperature. Don’t forget to open the doors and windows regularly so as to keep the air inside fresh and clean. To keep fit, take more exercise and have a good rest every day. If proper measures are taken as experts have suggested, bird flu can be prevented successfully.

That’s all. Thanks for your listening.

篇9：unit 11 reading(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

Step I Greetings

Step II Lead-in

Step III Pre-reading

Work in pairs or groups and discuss the following questions:

1. If you wanted to do research or start a hi-tech company, what kind of support and environment would you need?

A person who wants to do research or start a hi-tech company may need the following: money, schools, libraries, scientists and experts, ideas, inspiration, etc.

2. Why are scientific achievements important?

Because they help people understand the world better / improve our life / help advance science / lead to new discoveries and achievements, etc.

3. Why do scientists spend so much time trying to achieve something?

Because they are curious and enthusiastic about new things and new ideas / they want to understand the world better / they want to contribute to society / they want to be famous.

Step IV Reading

Fast-reading:

Say True or False to the following sentences.

1. Zhongguancun is located in the southwest of Beijing. (F)

2. Zhongguancun was set up in the nineteenth century. (F)

3. Xiang Yufang didn’t want to return to China because he wanted to work with the top scientists in his field. (F)

4. Later his friends persuaded him to come back . (F)

5. Zhongguancun has a positive effect on business. (T)

Read the text again and find out the main idea of each part:

Part 1 (para 1--- 2):

General introdution of Zhongguancun

Part2 (para 3--- 7):

Why Zhongguancun attracts more and more overseas Chinese

Part3 (para 8 --- 9):

The positive effect Zhongguancun has had on both business and science; the spirit of Zhonguancun

Step V Post-reading

Careful-reading:

Choose the best answer.

1. According to the author, Zhongguancun is home to ___A___.

A. some famous research institutes and universities

B. every Chinese

C. all of the graduates

D. all private research institutes

2. The science park got started __B__.

A. in the late 1990s B. in the early1980s

C. in the early 1990s D. in the late 1980s

3. What is NOT true about Zhongguancun ? (D)

A. It is located in Haidian District, in northwestern Beijing.

B. It was set up as a special economic zone in the 1990s.

C. Most of its companies are doing IT business.

D. It is not a good place for new companies.

4. According to the reading, Xiang Yufang returned to China and opened

a company in Zhongguancun because ___D____.

A. he wanted to see more of the world

B. he enjoyed working with the best scientists in his field

C. he felt really comfortable

D. he could enjoy his work and contribute to his country at the same

time

5. According to the graph in the passage, how many of the people who work in Zhongguancun have a master’s degree or above? (B)

A. 25,000 B.30,000

C. 35,000 D.180,000

6. Today there are ___C___ IT companies in Zhongguancun.

A. more than 8,000 B. less than 8,000

C. more than 4,000 D. less than 4,000

Work in pairs or groups. Zhong guancun is sometimes called “China’s Silicon Valley”. Use a library or the Internet to find out more about Silicon Valley in the Us and then compare the two areas. In which ways are they similar or different?

Answers on P 19.

Step VI Homework

Preview the language points in the text.

篇10：高二英语Unit 18(全)(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

Ⅰ.Brief Statements Based on the Unit

This unit provides the students good English language materials.Their interest in creating something useful will be aroused.In the first period,we’ll begin with how the students come to school.Then problems such as flat tyre will come up.In order to solve the problem,we’ll see a new type of bicycle and other new inventions.While talking about them,the students’ speaking ability will be improved.Listening is about two men,who want patents.After listening to it,the students will improve their listening ability.And students will practise how to express and support an opinion in the speaking part.In the second period,the text will be dealt with.The students’ interest of creation will be greatly aroused.Students will improve their reading ability as well as master the useful words and expressions.In the third period,some useful words and expressions will be mastered by the students after they finish the exercises.Also,the Attributive clause is reviewed in this period.In the last period,students will learn some useful words and expressions from the reading passage.And the students are asked to write an article describing a computer to improve their writing ability.After Ss study the whole unit,their abilities to listen,speak,read and write will be improved.

Ⅱ.Teaching Goals

1.Talk about inventions.

2.Practise expressing and supporting an opinion.

3.Review the Attributive Clause.

4.Write a process essay.

Ⅲ.Background Information

1.Practical Computer English

Cannot open list file(不能打开清单文件)

Cannot open run file(不能打开运行文件)

Compare process ended(比较处理结束)

Compare more files(Y/N)(还作文件比较吗？)

Copy complete(拷贝完成)

Copy another(Y/N)（还要拷贝另一个吗？）

Under finded line number(未定义行号)

Directory entries adjusted(目录页已调整)

Disk boot failure(磁盘自举失败)

Disk not compatible(磁盘不兼容)

Data record too large(数据记录太大)

Entry error(登记项错误)

Error loading operating system(装入操作系统的错误)

File sharing conflict(文件共享的冲突)

Files are different sizes(文件大小不同)

Files compare OK(文件比较成功)

Incorrect parameter(参数不正确)

Insufficient disk space(磁盘空间不足)

Insufficient memory(内存空间不足)

Can’t continue(不可能继续)

Device fault(设备故障)

Device I/O error(I/O设备错)

Device timeout(设备超时)

Disk full(磁盘满)

Disk write protect(磁盘写保护)

Disk not ready(磁盘没准备好)

Division by zero(除数为零)

Duplicate definition(重复定义)

File already exists(文件已经存在)

File already open(文件已打开)

File not found(文件没找到)

FOR without NEXT(For语句中没有对应的next语句)

Illegal direct(非法的直接使用)

Illegal function call(非法函数调用)

Incorrect DOS version(不正确的DOS版本)

Internal error(内部错误)

out of data(数据不够)

out of memory(超内存)

out of paper(打印纸不够)

overflow(溢出)

Path not found(路径没找到)

String too long(字符串过长)

Subscript out of range(下标范围不够)

Syntax error(句法错误)

Too many files(文件过多)

Type mismatch(类型不匹配)

Access denied(存取被拒绝)

Backup file sequence error(后备文件顺序错误)

Bad or missing command interpreter(非法的或缺少命令解释程序)

Bad partition table(非法的区分表)

Bad unit(非法的装置)

Batch file missing(批处理文件丢失)

Cannot execute FORMAT(不能执行FORMAT)

Cannot find system files(找不到系统文件)

Cannot open overlay(不能打开覆盖段)

2.TV of the Future

Where is television going from here?Television,the box itself and what it does,is changing greatly.While nobody is really sure what it’s going to look like,TV and the Internet are coming silently together.In the old days of broadcasting,people used to say that the real miracle(奇迹)of television was turning air into money.The television miracle of the future is interactive(相互影响的).

“The Internet is the most significant change in creating what becomes the next mass media that I think any of us will experience in our lifetime,”says Tom Frank,a network expert.Using unused lines in the TV spectrum(范围),broadcasters are learning how to put brand-new interactivity into TV programs.There will be a little instrument that will indicate that interactivity is present and possible.Then,just will a standard remote control like this you would be able to press one button and say,start that interactivity.A menu would appear,similar to the one on a web site,that would let you interact with the program as it was being broadcast.If you are watching a cooking show,for example,you can print the recipe(烹饪法)or even pause the show and buy the ingredients.Many web sites do exist now where you can actually get your food shopping done for yourself and delivered to your house.So you can order the very ingredients for the dish you are watching the chef make on TV.And it will bring the right quantity of things directly to your house.

You could also interact with TV commercials.While you’re watching a commercial,you have the choice to buy the clothes the actors are wearing.Of course,the more you interact with this new sort of TV,the more you leave a digital record,and the more advertisers learn about your shopping habits.In fact,TV ads might be targeted at this special group of people who share a common interest.In the future,almost anything might be possible.Even news programs like World News Tonight could be improved.You could have the choice of changing camera angles.If you wanted,you could pause what a reporter is saying and go back to World News Tonight to watch the next story,or skip to the last story in the show,or perhaps go deeper into a topic and view an interview prepared for Nightline later on.In the near future,you’re expected to see television develop to become more like the Internet,meaning more choice,the ability to do the sorts of things you want to do at the moment you wish to do them.

Ⅳ.Teaching Time:Five periods

The First Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Improve the students’ listening ability.

2.Talk about some topics about inventions and practise supporting an opinion.

3.Learn and master some useful words and expressions.

Teaching Important Point:

Train the students’ listening and speaking abilities by talking about and listening to some materials.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to help students to improve their listening ability.

2.How to help the students to learn to express and support an opinion.

Teaching Methods:

1.Discussion to make students talk about inventions.

2.Individual or pair work to make students practise their speaking ability.

3.Listening practice to improve the students’ listening ability.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

3.some cards

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Warming-up and Discussion

T:(Walk to one student.)How do you come to school every day,Wang Jing?

S:I come to school on foot every day.My home is quite near.It only takes me about ten minutes.

T:That’s quite convenient.You’re lucky.And,Li Fang,how about you?

S:I come to school by bike.It takes me about 15 minutes to get to our school.

T:You must be careful on your way to and from school.There must be many people on the road.Do you think it convenient?

S:Most of the time it is,but sometimes my bike has a flat tyre.I have to get it repaired and therefore I’ll be late for school.Once I even lost my bike.When I went to get it,it was gone.I had to take a taxi to go home and buy another bike.

T:I’m sorry to hear that.But suppose a new type of bike has been invented,what do you want it to be like?

S:I think the new type of bike can be folded up and carried about so that it will not be stolen.

T:Good idea.But this is not very convenient.It’s not easy for you to carry a bike around,is it?

S:No,it isn’t.What should it look like then?Please tell us.

T:OK.Let’s watch the short video.

(Play the video for explaining how an inflatable bicycle works.)

T:That’s the new type of bike.It’s a kind of inflatable bicycle.Who can tell us the advantages of it?

S:Let me have a try.We’ll not have to worry about having our bikes stolen again.Because we can let the air out and put the bike in bag.It’s very convenient to be carried around since it is not heavy.

T:Very good.I think I’ll buy one when it is on sale.We know that inventions can make our life easier and better.Today we’ll talk about some inventions.

(Stick the pictures of electric shoes,inflatable bicycle,edible chopsticks and nose-top computer on the blackboard and then mark one,two,three and four.)

① ②

③ ④

T:Look at these pictures,please.Do you know what they are?Li Jie,will you have a try?

S:I think the second invention is the inflatable bike that we’ve just talked about.In the third picture,the man is eating the chopsticks after his meal.I guess these chopsticks are edible ones.I’m not sure about the others.

T:Good.You’re right.The second one is the inflatable bicycle.(Bb:inflatable bicycle)and the third are edible chopsticks.(Bb:edible chopsticks)They’re delicious and environmentally friendly. We can save some trees and have a snack at the same time.They come in five different flavours. You will never need to wash chopsticks again.Isn’t this wonderful?

S:Yes,it’s great.But,Miss Guo,maybe we could invent edible plates,bowls,cups and so on.

T:Oh,you’re great!I’m sure you have got a wonderful idea.Maybe one day you can invent such things.Study hard and you’ll be an inventor in the future.Now,let’s look at the first picture.Who knows what it is?

S:I think it is a special kind of shoe which can make electricity.If we wear such shoes,we can see the road in dark places.We needn’t take a flashlight with us any more.

S:I don’t quite agree with you.Maybe this shoe can make you feel warm using the electricity it makes.

T:You both are very clever.This is called the electric shoe.(Bb:electric shoe)The heel of this shoe is a machine that makes electricity with every step you take.You will never need batteries again.But maybe you have better ideas about how to make use of the electricity it makes.If you like,you could have a try to make your own invention in your spare time.Now,let’s look at the fourth picture.Does anybody have an idea?

S:It looks like a computer which is fixed onto the man’s nose.And the keyboard is on his vest.I can’t believe it.

T:Yes,you’re quite right.This is called the nose-top computer.(Bb:nose-top computer)This new nose-top computer weighs less than a pair of glasses.It fits comfortably on your nose.When you want to type something you can use the keyboard vest.You will never have to carry a heavy laptop computer.These inventions are all wonderful.But which of them do you think would be useful?Please have a discussion in groups of four and tell us why you think so.

(Ss have their discussions in groups of four for about five minutes.Teacher may ask one group to act out their discussion or report their results.)

Sample dialogue:

A:I think the inflatable bicycle would be useful.Because it’s convenient to carry and we needn’t worry about having our bikes stolen.

B:That’s quite true,but I think the edible chopsticks are useful.Because it not only saves trees but also saves water.It is very important to save our natural resources and protect our earth.

C:You’re quite right,but I have a different opinion.I think the nose-top computer is useful.Because the computer is used more and more widely.It’s convenient to carry such a computer around when doing business.

…

Step Ⅲ Preparation for Listening

T:We know that when someone has invented something,usually he will go to a patent officer to apply for a patent.Now,let’s listen to two dialogues.In these two dialogues,Mr Dean and Mr Scoles both have invented something.They’re trying to get the patent for their inventions from the patent officer.Before we listen to the tape,go through the questions on Page 15 by yourselves,and see what we should do after listening.

Step Ⅳ Listening

T:(A few minutes later.)Are you ready?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Listen carefully and answer the questions first on your own and then check your answers with your partner.

(Play the tape twice for students to listen to and then answer the questions.Play it a third time for students to check their answers.Allow the students a few minutes to check their answers in pairs.At last,check the answers with the whole class.)

Step ⅤSpeaking

T:Well done.Now,you’ve known how to apply for a patent.Let’s play a game.Each of you will be given a role card.Work in groups of five:four inventors and one patent officer.Each inventor should explain how the invention works and why it is useful.The patent officers should ask questions and decide if each invention is a good idea or not.And I’ll show you some useful expressions to help you.

(Hand out the role cards and show the useful expressions on the multimedia.)

Useful Expressions:

This invention can help people…

What does it look like?

What’s it made of?

This is a new way of…

How does it work?

How would people use it?

This new invention will make it possible for people to…

(Students work in groups of five and have a discussion for about five minutes.Then the teacher may ask some groups to act out their discussion.)

Sample dialogue:

(A-Inventor A;B-Inventor B;C-Inventor C;D-Inventor D;P-Patent officer)

P:Now,please explain how your inventions work and why they are useful.Your invention is a car that uses water instead of petrol,isn’t it?

A:Yes,that’s right.

P:What does it look like?

A:It looks like an ordinary car.Here’s the picture.Please have a look.

P:Oh,it looks beautiful.What’s it made of?

A:It’s made of a new kind of alloy,which is much lighter.

P:Does it cost more?

A:A little bit.But it can save much more energy,so lots of money is saved.Besides,there is something even more important.It is good for our environment.It doesn’t pollute the air.

P:Sounds great.Thank you.And what’s your invention,sir?

B:My invention is a flying bicycle.

P:A flying bicycle?How would people use it?

B:People can ride it on the road and when there are too many bicycles,people can fly it.Just push one button on the handle,the bicycle will fly.

P:How does it work?

B:It works like a small plane.It has a special engine.

P:This is a new way to improve our traffic condition.Thank you.(To C)Would you please explain your new invention to me?

C:My invention is a machine that makes it possible for people to know the future.

P:How would people use it?

C:People just input their date of birth,hobbies,dislikes and anything about themselves,and then press the button,wait for a moment,and they will see the result on the screen.

P:That’s interesting.Thank you.(To D)What’s your invention,please?

D:It’s a pen that can automatically translate what you write into a foreign language.

P:Good.It can help people communicate freely with foreign friends.People needn’t study foreign languages hard any more.But,maybe it will make it more difficult for people to communicate orally.They will have to write down what they want to say.This is not convenient. For the flying bicycle,what if there was something wrong with it when it was flying in the air?I think it would be rather dangerous for the people walking on the ground.Maybe the bike would fall onto them and cause an accident.Of course the rider would be in danger,too.For the machine that makes people know the future,I don’t think it’s a good idea for us to know our future too early.I think the most useful invention is the car that uses water instead of petrol.So I will give the inventor of this new car a patent.

A:Thank you,sir.

Step Ⅵ Summary and Homework

T:Today we’ve learnt how to express and support an opinion.And we’ve learnt how to apply for a patent when you have made an invention.Many of you have wonderful ideas about new inventions.Study hard now and I believe you’ll make your own inventions in the future.In the next period,we’ll read about how to be creative and how to be an inventor.It’ll be very useful for you.Preview the reading part carefully after class,please.OK.That’s all for today.See you tomorrow!

Ss:See you tomorrow!

Step Ⅶ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 18 Inventions

The First Period

① ②

electric shoe inflatable bicycle

③ ④

edible chopsticks nose-top computer

The second period

Ⅰ Teaching Aims:

Learn and master some new and important language points;

Improve the Ss’ reading ability by reading and comprehending the text;

Get the Ss to learn how to be creative.

Ⅱ Teaching Focuses:

The main idea of the text.

Finish all the reading comprehension exercises.

The four thinking strategies.

Ⅲ Teaching Methods:

Question-and-answer activity. Some games.

Group work, pair work or individual work to make every student work in class.

Ⅳ Teaching Aids:

1．A multi-media computer 2．A tape recorder and a tape.

Ⅴ Teaching Procedures:

Step 1 Lead - in

Show a picture of a bulb to the students. Ask: Who invented it?

Then show the portrait of Edison to the students. Ask: Do you know anything about his childhood? If they don’t, tell them sth. about his schooling, and then say: People are not born creative, and you don’t have to be very intelligent to be an inventor. We can learn to be creative. Today we’ll learn how to be creative.

Step 2 Pre-reading

Scan the title and the four sub-titles, and guess what’s the text about?

A. how to become a great thinker

B. how to improve your IQ

C. how to become more creative

Step 3 Fast-reading

1.What’s creative thinking?

It is one of skills and habits.

2.How do people come up with ideas for new inventions? In how many ways?

By good thinking strategies.

Step 4 Careful-reading

T: well, now let’s read the text carefully by listening to and reading after the tape one paragragh after another. You are required to finish off all the comprehension tasks for each part.

Part 1: general idea.

Part 2: What is to “think outside the box”?

To think outside the box is to try new ways to solve a problem.

To rephrase a problem to allow for creative solutions and also try “impossible” or “crazy”solutions.

To make a conscious effort to break away from old thought patterns.

Game 1: How do you connect all the dots with only four straight lines?

Game 2:

Mike’s father is a policeman. Why did Mike recognize him among his workmates though they were all in uniform?

Who never goes to see a doctor,even when he is ill ?

It is leaking( 漏水 ) everywhere in the office on a rainy day, why nobody has got wet?

The plane crashed, but there were nobody injured. Why?

Why a river richer than a bank?

Part 3: Take another look at it

a change in perception

to look at a problem in as many way as possible

Each new way of looking at a situation improves our understanding and makes it easier to discover new possibilities.

Game 3:

Can you only see a pot? Pay attention to the dark!

Two faces!

Part 4: Make connections

try to combine new and old ideas in as many different ways as possible

try to make connections that may seem strange at first

think of new applications and solutions

Part 5: Keep trying

develop new ideas even when they were tired or did not feel inspired

For each new invention that works, there are at least ten that do not.

Step 5 Post-reading

1. Match the examples with the right titles:

Example 1: think outside the box.

Examples 2&3: keep trying

Example 4: take another look at it.

Example5: make connections.

2. T or F exercises.

1) Most inventors have high IQs.

2) The things we know can sometimes make it more difficult for us to understand.

3) It’s impossible to learn how to be creative.

4) The best way to find a good solution is to look for one good answer.

5) Inventors try to avoid failure.

6) The more ways we have of looking at a problem, the more likely it is that we can find a solution.

7) Most good ideas are the result of a long process of trial and error.

3.Reading comprehension.

1) We can get the conclusion from the fifth paragraph that ____ A. to be clever can lead to success B. he who laughs last laughs best

C. failure is the mother of success D. never too old to learn

2). The sentence “ good ideas are no accident” means the following except that ____

A. Good ideas never come by chance. B. The accident is not caused by good ideas.

C. To be successful needs many trials and errors.

D. Failures can also help us move towards a better solution.

3). Another proper title for the text is probably ____

A.Creativity B.Great thinkers C. How to solve problems D. Connection

Step 6 Discussion (Groupwork):

1. How do you understand the title of the passage?

If we want to be creative, we should follow these rules---think outside the box, take another look at it, make connections and keep trying. These rules also work when we solve a problem .

2. What other rules should you have if we want to be creative?

3. Of all the rules discussed above, which one do you think is the most important? Why?

Step 7: Homework

P 61 Exx 1 & 2.P 131 Exx 1, 2&3.

Ⅵ Bb writing

On slides. No writing on the Bb

The Third Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit.

2.Learn the derivatives of some words.

3.Review the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Important Points:

1.The useful expressions learnt in this unit.

2.Review the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to help students master the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Methods:

1.Review method to consolidate the useful expressions learnt in the last two periods.

2.Practise to help students master the derivatives of some words.

3.Different kinds of practice to help students master the Attributive Clause.

4.Pair work and individual work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

3.some pictures and cards

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Grammar

T:Today we’ll play a game first.(Stick some pictures of famous people on the blackboard.Cf:The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard.)Look at the blackboard,please.These are pictures of some famous people.Do you know them?Maybe you’re familiar with some of them,but maybe others are strange to you.Don’t worry.I’ll give you some cards.There’s one sentence on each card.The sentence describes a famous person.Guess the name of the person first and then match the card with the picture.Do you understand?

Ss:Yes.

(Teacher hands out some cards on which are the sentences in Word puzzle.)

T:Now,please have a short discussion to find out who the person is and then match the card with the picture.When you find out the answer,please come to the blackboard,stick the card and write the name below the picture.

(Students prepare for a moment and then they begin to match the cards with the pictures.)

T:Have they matched the cards with the pictures correctly and got the correct names?

Ss:Yes.

(If there’re any mistakes,teacher may ask some students to correct them.)

T:OK.Now,fill in the word puzzle using the names of the people that you’ve just found out.

(Stick on the blackboard a piece of paper with the word puzzle on it.)

(A moment later,ask several students to write down their answers.Cf:The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard.)

T:Do you agree with them?

Ss:Yes,they’re quite right.

T:Good.These people are all famous people.Look at the sentences on the cards.What do you find?

S:I find that there is an Attributive Clause in each sentence,restrictive or non-restrictive.

T:Yes,you’re a careful girl.This game is also for you to review the Attributive Clause.Read these sentences again and find out the Attributive Clause in each sentence.

(A moment later,ask some students to say their answers.)

Suggested answers:

Across:

1.…,whose name is always linked with his cartoon characters,such as Mickey Mouse and Donald Duck.

2.…,who was born in Germany but spent his last years in the USA.

3.…,among whose big inventions are electric lighting and the motion picture camera.

4.…,whose many great films were City Lights and Modern Times.

5.…,who died in a plane crash in .

6.…,whose famous songs include Blowing In The Wind.

7.…,who discovered the Law of Gravity.

Down:

1.…,who lived in China before the Liberation.

2.…,who fought for the freedom of slaves in the USA.

3.…,who was Adam’s wife.

4.…,whose ideas about the future have often become reality,…

5.…,who later bravely fought against the British invasion and saved her country and people.

T:We’ve learnt a lot about the Attributive Clause before.We know that it is a very important grammar item,so let’s do some more exercises to consolidate it.Turn to Page 61,and finish Exercise 2 in Grammar part.

(Allow the students a few minutes to finish it and then check the answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.The wires with which the machines were connected were very old.

2.Leonardo da Vinci,who was interested in both literature and science,painted the famous“Smiling Mona Lisa”.

3.The pilot with whom we had dinner told us stories about his travels.

4.The four ancient Chinese inventions,which we are proud of,have remained important in human history for thousands of years.

5.Mozart,whose music is well liked by people all over the world,showed his talent in music at a very young age.

6.The photos are kept in that cupboard in which/where we found our parents’ old photos.

7.The country from which this news report is coming is on the other side of the world.

8.One of the first inventions of human beings was the wheel,which we don’t know who first invented.

T:In this unit,we have learnt a lot about new inventions and famous inventors.Now,let’s do an exercise using what we’ve learnt in this unit to review the Attributive Clause.Turn to Page 61 and finish Exercise 1 in Grammar part,please.Finish them first by yourselves and then you may discuss your answers in pairs.

(A few minutes later,ask some students to read out their answers.Students may have various answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.…can be used at home or in an office.

2.…it is not convenient to use a desktop computer.

3.…businesses are busy.

4.…you can obtain a patent for your invention.

5.…we need something more useful or more convenient to satisfy the needs of people.

6.…invents things.

7.…are both delicious and environmentally friendly./can be eaten.

Step Ⅲ Word Study

T:As you know,there are a lot of useful expressions in this unit.Let’s do some exercises to review them.

(Show the following on the multimedia and allow the students a couple of minutes to finish it.)

Fill in the blanks with correct prepositions.

1.I’m tired__________washing clothes by hand.I’ll buy a washing machine tomorrow.

2.You’ve got to break away__________old thought patterns in order to develop creative thinking.

3.She was telling us about her sick mother when she suddenly broke__________tears.

4.The students like physics classes because the way their teacher teaches allows__________creativity.

5.I don’t want to keep the hen any more;I’ll exchange it__________twenty eggs.

6.During a test,it’s always wise to move on when you get stuck__________a difficult problem and come back to it later.

(A moment later,ask some students to say their answers and then check them with the whole class.Give some explanations when necessary.)

Suggested answers:

1.of(be tired of doing sth.)

2.from(break away from…)

3.into(break into tears/a house)

4.for(allow for…)

5.for(exchange A for B)

6.by(get stuck by…)

T:Well done!After class you should read these sentences more to master the use of the phrases in them.Now,let’s do another practice.

(Show the following on the multimedia.)

Change the form of the following words.

trial→__________(v.)

application→__________(v.)

produce→__________(adj.)

fail→__________(n.)

involvement→__________(v.)

eraser→__________(v.)

inspiration→__________(v.)

possible→__________(n.)

deep→__________(v.)

awareness→__________(adj.)

Suggested answers:

trial→try(v.)

application→apply(v.)

produce→productive(adj.)

fail→failure(n.)

involvement→involve(v.)

eraser→erase(v.)

inspiration→inspire(v.)

possible→possibility(n.)

deep→deepen(v.)

awareness→aware(adj.)

StepⅣ Summary and Homework

T:Today we’ve reviewed some useful expressions and words we learnt before.Also we’ve done some practice to review the Attributive Clause.After class,you should do more practice to master them better.Besides,try to solve the riddles in Part 14 on Page 62.That’s all for today.See you tomorrow!

Ss:See you tomorrow!

Step Ⅴ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 18 Inventions

The Third Period

Walt Disney Albert Einstein

Abraham Lincoln Newton

John Denver Charlie Chaplin

Word puzzle:

The Fourth Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn a reading passage to improve the students’ reading ability.

2.Do some writing practice to improve the students’ writing ability.

3.Learn some useful words and expressions.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students’ integrating skills.

2.Review the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to improve the students’ integrating skills.

Teaching Methods:

1.Reading and understanding to improve the students’ reading ability.

2.Writing practice to improve the students’ writing ability.

3.Individual or pair work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step ⅡLead-in and Reading

T:How many of you have a computer at home?Please put up your hands.

(Some students put up their hands.)

Good.Most of you have a computer.What do you do with your computer?

S:I search for information on the Internet.And sometimes I play games with it.

T:Does anybody do anything else with it?

S:I sometimes draw pictures or type something.

S:For me,I sometimes send e-mails to my friends.

S:I listen to the music.

S:I watch football matches.

…

T:Do you think the computer is really useful to you?

S:Not exactly.I can also do these things without a computer.I can go to a library to look for the information that I need.But it’s much quicker and more convenient if I use a computer.

S:I can listen to the music on a tape recorder.

S:I can watch football matches on TV.

…

T:You’re quite right.New technology is often used in old ways.Now,please have a discussion in groups of four to complete the chart shown on the screen.

(Show the following on the screen and give the students a moment to have a discussion.)

Technology Usage

Computer Used as a typewriter

--------

The Internet Used as a library

--------

------ --------

--------

(After a few minutes,ask several students to say their answers.Students may have various answers.)

Suggested answers:

Technology Usage

Computer Used as:

a typewriter

a projector

a video game player

a drawing board

The Internet Used as:

a library

a TV

a telephone

a radio

Used to:

send e-mails

read news from home and abroad

Cellphone Used as:

a telephone

a telephone directory

a video game player

a watch/calendar

an alarm clock

Used to:

send information to others

T:Well done!Now,let’s read the passage about new technology carefully.Try to find out the answers to the two questions on the screen.After you finish,you may have a discussion in pairs.

(The following questions are shown on the screen.)

1.Why are scientific metaphors like “memory”and“cut and paste” useful?How may they limit our thinking?

2.Think of more words we use to talk about computers and Internet.How well do they describe the things or actions they are used for?Are there other words we could use that might be better?

(A moment later,check the answers with the whole class.Students may have various answers to the second question.)

Suggested answers:

1.They make it easier for us to understand and use a new tool.They may make it more difficult for us to use the new invention in the best way.

2.Words like:copy,file,delete,lock,enter,return,store

Step Ⅲ Explanation

T:Now,I think you’ve understood the passage well.Please look at the screen.I’ll explain some expressions that you must master.Please listen carefully.

(The multimedia shows the following.)

Language Points:

1.sb. be said to be…

e.g.He is said to be a good basketball player when he was young.

2.A be similar to B

e.g.His new bike is similar to mine.

3.be different from

e.g.Our life is different from what it was ten years ago.

4.now that

e.g.Now that you’ve grown up,you must stop this childish behaviour.

(Explain the notes to students and write the following on the blackboard:sb. be said to be;A be similar to B;be different from;now that.)

Step Ⅳ Listening and Reading Aloud

T:Now,let’s listen to the tape carefully.You can read after it when I play it the second time.Pay more attention to your stress.Are you ready?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Let’s begin.

(Play the tape twice for students to listen and repeat.After listening to the tape,students are allowed to read the passage aloud for a while.At last,ask some of them to read the text.One student,one paragraph.)

Step ⅤWriting

T:Just now,we’ve talked about computers.Most of you have a desktop computer at home.(Stick a picture of a desktop computer on the blackboard.)And as you can see,I’m using a laptop computer.(Stick a picture of laptop computer on the blackboard.)These are the most popular computers that we can find.But have you heard that a new type of computer-the palmtop computer,has been invented?

Ss:No.

T:It doesn’t matter.(Stick a picture of a palmtop computer on the blackboard.)Look at the picture.This is a palmtop computer.We know from the picture that a palmtop computer is a kind of computer that we can put on our palm.It’s very small,light and convenient to carry about.Do you like it?

Ss:Yes,I wish I could have one.

T:Certainly you’ll have one someday in the future.From these three pictures we know that computers are getting smaller and smaller.They’re becoming more and more convenient to be carried about.Can you guess what the first computer was like?

S:I guess it must have been a very big one.

T:You’re quite right.(Stick the picture of the Eniac on the blackboard.)Look,this is the first computer.It is as big as a house.Maybe you can’t imagine how big it is.But it doesn’t matter.What we need to know is that computers are becoming smaller and smaller,lighter and lighter.What do you think they will look like in the future and how we will use them?Who’d like to tell us your opinion?

S:Let me try.I think computers may look like a watch or a cellphone in the future.They will become even smaller.We can use them to watch TV,read books,search for information,chat with our friends,check the date and the time,and send information to others.

T:Very good.Now,imagine that you had to describe a computer to someone who lived in the 19th century.How would you explain it?What would you compare it to?You may have a short discussion in groups of three and then write a short description.

(Allow the students a few minutes to discuss and write their compositions.If time limits,allow the students to finish their writing after class.)

Sample description:

Have you seen a computer?Let me tell you something about it.A computer is an electric calculating machine that can store and recall information and make calculations at very high speed.It is a wonderful machine and can do most of the things people can do,but it can work millions of times faster.The first large,modern computer was built in 1946,and people needed a large house to put it in.In the last few years there have been great changes in computers.Today they can be used in many fields.People even use it to pay their bills or order what they want.It is said that in the future computers would arrange everything for people,and do almost all kinds of work.That would be a real computer society!

Step ⅥSummary and Homework

T:Today we’ve read a passage about the scientific metaphors.We’ve talked more about new technology too.In this unit we also learnt how to become more creative by practising good thinking strategies.They can be used to study English,too.Read the tips on Page 64 carefully and try the ideas in future.They’re helpful for your study of English.Besides,we’ve reviewed the Attributive Clause.After class,you should do more practice by yourselves to master it better.Finally,have a discussion with your partner to find the answers to the two questions in Checkpoint 18 on Page 64.I’ll check your answers tomorrow.OK.That’s all for today.

…

Suggested answers:

1.Rephrase,impossible,crazy,break away from,explore,combine,trial,…

2.Convenient,environmentally,friendly,automatically,…

Step Ⅶ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 18 Inventions

The Fourth Period

Language Points:

sb. be said to be…

be different from

A be similar to B

now that

Computers:

The Fifth Period

The Attributive Clause

Teaching Aims:

1.Revise the Attributive Clause,including the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

2.Revise the use of relative pronouns and relative adverbs.

3.Expand the knowledge of the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Important Point:

The usage of the relative pronouns and adverbs.

Teaching Difficult Point:

Help the students to master the way of choosing a relative pronoun or a relative adverb correctly.

Teaching Methods:

review,explanation,inductive methods

Teaching Aids:

1.the blackboard

2.the multimedia

Teaching Procedures:

Step ⅠGreetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Revision and Lead-in

(Teacher checks the homework exercises first and then shows the following on the screen.)

1.He is a famous scientist.

2.Who’s that girl in red?

3.I’ve read all the books that you lent me.

4.I have lost my pen,which I like very much.

T:That’s all for the homework.Now please look at the sentences on the screen.Pay special attention to the underlined parts.Is there anything in common between them?

Ss:Yes.They all identify the nouns,which are used with them.Each part tells us which thing or person the speaker is talking about.

T:That is to say,the function of each underlined part is the same.Each of them is used as an attribute to describe each noun.Well,are there any differences between them?

S1:Yes.In the first sentence,the attribute is an adjective and put before the noun;the second is a prepositional phrase put after the noun;the third and fourth sentences are full sentences put after the nouns.

T:You are right,what do we call the sentences put after the noun?

Ss:The Attributive Clause.

T:Quite right.In a complex sentence,the clause modifying a noun or a pronoun in the main clause is called an Attributive Clause.The noun or pronoun is called Antecedent.The word that/which introduces the clause(between the noun/pronoun and the clause)is called Relative Pronoun or Relative Adverb.The relative pronouns or adverbs do two jobs at once.They can be used as subjects,objects,attributes or adverbials in the clause;at the same time,they join clauses together.About the use of them,we’ll have particular revision after a while.Now look at the sentences on the screen.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

Complete the sentences with suitable relatives.

1.I know the reason__________he came late.

2.Do you know the woman,__________son went to college last year?

3.The house__________colour is red is John’s.

4.This is the best film__________I’ve ever seen.

5.That is the town__________he worked in 1987.

T:Who’d like to tell me what should be filled in the first sentence?

S2:I think“why”should be filled.Because the antecedent is“the reason”and the relative is used as the adverbial of reason in the Attributive Clause.

T:Yes.How about the second sentence?

(Teacher goes to another student and asks her/him to answer.)

S3:I fill“whose”here.Because the antecedent is “the woman”and the relative is used as the attribute in the Attributive Clause.

T:Right.Sit down,please.Now let’s look at the third sentence.

Suggested answers:

3.whose 4.that 5.where

Step Ⅲ Summarizethe Use of the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause

T:The Non-restrictive Attributive Clause is a clause which gives extra information to the antecedent.So we use a comma to interrupt the sentence.When the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause is cut off,the sentence still has a full meaning.Now look at the sentences on the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.I have two brothers,who are both soldiers.

2.Next week,which you’ll spend in your hometown,is coming.

3.I’ve tried two pairs of shoes,neither of which fits me well.

T:Pay attention to the underlined parts.There are commas to interrupt the sentences and “that”can not be used in the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.You should pay more attention to the structure“Indefinite Pronoun/Numbers/Noun/Superlative+of which/whom”is often used in the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

Step Ⅳ The Usage of the Relative Pronouns and the Relative Adverbs

T:As we know,relative pronouns or adverbs paly important parts in the Attributive Clause.Now let’s make a list of them on the blackboard first and then revise their usage with the help of the forms on the screen.

(Bb:the relative pronouns:who,whom,that,whose,which;the relative adverbs: when, where, why)

(Teacher collects them first and then shows the following.)

Form 1:

the relative pronouns referring to function in the clause

who people subject/object

whom people object

that people/thing subject/object

which thing subject/object

whose people/thing(of whom/which) attribute

Form 2:

the relative adverb referring to function in the clause

when(=at/in/on which) time adverbial of time

where(=in/at which) place adverbial of place

why(=for which) reason adverbial of reason

(Teacher explains the two forms separately and adds the following with examples on the screen.)

T:1.When a relative pronoun is used as a subject in the clause,the verb must agree with the antecedent in person and number.

e.g.1.Those who want to go to the cinema must be at the school gate by 3:30 p.m.

He who doesn’t reach the Great wall is not a true man.

2.When the antecedent is the structure of “one of +n.(pl.)”,the verb in the clause must be plural,agrees with the plural form.However,if there is “the”or“only”before“one”,the verb in the clause must be singular,agrees with the word“one”.

e.g.2.She is the only one of the girls who has been to Beijing.

He is one of the boys who have seen the film.

3.When the antecedent is a noun for time or place “when”or“where”is not always used to introduce the clause.It depends on the function of the relative word in the clause.

e.g.3.The time when/that I went to Tokyo is in 1982.

I’ll never forget the time which/that I spent at college.

The shop which I bought is big.

The shop where/in which I bought the book is big.

Step Ⅴ The Difference Between “that”and “which”

T:As we know,both“that”and “which”can be used for things,but,the use of them are not always the same.Let’s look at the sentences on the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.This is the second article that I have written in English.

2.It is the best film that he has ever seen.

3.This is the very book that I want to read.

4. All that they told me surprised me.

5.They talked about the teachers and schools that they had visited.

6. Who is the comrade that was there?

7.There is a bed in the room that is still vacant.

8.Our village is no longer the place that it used to be.

T:From the sentences on the screen,we can make a summary of the use of“that” and “which”.Look at the screen again.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.In following cases,“that”is often used.

(1)After ordinal number and superlatives.

(2)After the following words:all, only, little, few, much, very, none, last, just, any(thing), every(thing), some(thing),no(thing).

(3)After two or more antecedents,referring to both people and things.

(4)After interrogative pronouns“which”or “who”.

(5)When the relative pronoun is used as a predictive in the clause.

(6)When the main clause begins with “There be”.

2.In following cases,“which”is always used.

(1)After prepositions.

(2)To introduce a Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

(3)The whole main sentence is the “antecedant”of the relative clause,and there is always a comma.

Step Ⅵ Practice

T:Now let’s do some exercises.Look at the screen.Fill in the blanks,choosing proper relative pronouns or relative adverbs.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.Tell me the reason for__________you were late for class.

2.Who is the girl__________is speaking there?

3.This is Mr Smith,__________has some thing interesting to tell you.

4.The computer__________CPU doesn’t work has to be repaired.

5.This kind of computer,__________is well-known,is out of date.

6.This is just the place__________I’ve been longing to visit for years.

7.His mother is an engineer,__________makes him very proud.

8.The old man has four sons,three of__________are doctors.

Suggested answers:

1.which 2.that 3.who 4.whose

5.which 6.that 7.which 8.whom

Step Ⅶ Test

T:Now.Let’s have a test.Look at the screen.Do this exercise by yourself.A few minutes later.I’ll give you the answers.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.I don’t like the way__________he talked to his mother.

A.as B.that

C.which D.by which

2.In the dark street,there wasn’t a single person__________she could turn for help.

A.that B.who

C.from whom D.to whom

3.The weather turned out to be very good,__________was more than we could expected.

A.what B.which

C.that D.it

4.All__________is needed is a supply of oil.

A.the thing B.that

C.what D.which

5.He paid the boy $10 for washing the windows,most of__________hasn’t been cleaned at least a year.

A.these B.those

C.that D.which

6.She spoke about the books and writers__________she remembered.

A.that B.who

C.which D.whom

7.The clever boy made a hole in the wall,__________he could see what was going on inside the house.

A.in which B.through which

C.at which D.on which

Suggested answers:

1.B 2.D 3.B 4.B 5.D 6.A 7.B

Step Ⅷ Homework

Review the Attributive Clause

Step Ⅸ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 18 Inventions

The Fifth Period

The Attributive Clause

Ⅰ.The differences between the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause

Ⅱ.The use of the relative words:

1.relative pronouns:who,whom,whose,that,which

2.relative adverbs:where,when,why

Ⅲ.The differences between“that”and “which”

Record after Teaching

篇11：高二英语Unit 17(全)(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

Ⅰ.Brief Statements Based on the Unit

This unit mainly tells us the difficulties that the disabled people may face.The text“Disabled? Not me!”shows us a middle school student-Zhong Xiaowen,who could only move around in her wheelchair,could overcome lots of difficulties,and finally succeeded.From her success,we learn something important.There is nothing difficult in the world if you stick to it.When you meet with difficulty in your life and study,please don’t lose heart.

The teacher should train the students’ mental and moral character of taking pleasure in helping the disabled and help the students to know how to help the disabled to build up the spirit of “being stronger,independent and equal to normal people in activities”.Of course it is necessary for students to master the important phrases and sentence patterns in this unit.Meanwhile we should review the usage of the Direct and Indirect Object.

Ⅱ.Teaching Goals

1.Talk about disability.

2.Practise talking about ability and inability.

3.Review Direct and Indirect Objects.

4.Write an argumentative essay.

Ⅲ.Background Information

1.Will Inspired Life

The little country schoolhouse was heated by an old-fashioned,pot-bellied coal stove.A little boy had the job of coming to school early each day to start the fire and warm the room before his teacher and his classmates arrived.

One morning they arrived to find the schoolhouse engulfed in flames.They dragged the unconscious little boy out of the flaming building more dead than alive.He had major burns over the lower half of his body and was taken to a nearby county hospital.From his bed the dreadfully burned,semiconscious little boy faintly heard the doctor talking to his mother.The doctor told his mother that her son would surely die-which was for the best,really-for the terrible fire had devastated the lower half of his body.

But the brave boy didn’t want to die.He made up his mind that he would survive.Somehow,to the amazement of the physician,he did survive.When the mortal danger was past,he again heard the doctor and his mother speaking quietly.The mother was told that since the fire had destroyed so much flesh in the lower part of his body,it would almost be better if he had died,since he was doomed to be a lifetime cripple with no use at all of his lower limbs.

Once more the brave boy made up his mind.He would not be a cripple.He would walk.But unfortunately,from the waist down,he had no motor ability.His thin legs just dangled there,all but lifeless.Ultimately he was released from the hospital.Every day his mother would massage his little legs,but there was no feeling,no control,nothing.Yet his determination that he would walk was as strong as ever.When he wasn’t in bed,he was confined to a wheelchair.One sunny day his mother wheeled him out into the yard to get some fresh air.This day,instead of sitting there,he threw himself from the chair.He pulled himself across the grass,dragging his legs behind him.He worked his way to the white picket fence bordering their lot.With great effort,he raised himself up on the fence.Then,stake by stake,he began dragging himself along the fence,resolved that he would walk.He started to do this every day until he wore a smooth path all around the yard beside the fence.There was nothing he wanted more than to develop life in those legs.Ultimately through his daily massages,his iron persistence and his resolute determination,he did develop the ability to stand up,then to walk haltingly,then to walk by himself-and then-to run.He began to walk to school,then to run to school,to run for the sheer joy of running.Later in college he made the track team.Still later in Madison Square Garden this young man who was not expected to survive,who would surely never walk,who could never hope to run-this determined young man,Dr. Glenn Cunningham,ran the world’s fastest mile!

2.Helen Keller

Helen Keller(1880~1968) was a famous author and educator.She was stricken at the age of 19 months with an illness that left her deaf and blind.She became mute shortly thereafter.Her parents in 1887 got her a teacher Anne Mansfield Sullivan from the Perkings School for the Blind in Boston.A remarkable,close relationship developed between teacher and pupil.Within two years,Miss Keller was able to read and write in Braille.She graduated(1904)from Radcliffe College,where Miss Sullivan had spelled the lectures into her hand.

Helen Keller devoted her life to publicly aiding the deaf and blind.With the aid of a translator,she toured the world to promote the education of persons similarly afflicted.She wrote numerous books,including“The Story of My Life”(1902).

Ⅳ.Teaching Time:Four periods

The First Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the following:

Phrases:deal with,overcome the difficulties

Sentence Patterns:

If you were in a wheelchair,you wouldn’t be able to…

If I were blind,I would need a/an…

2.Train the students’ listening ability.

3.Improve the students’ speaking ability by describing,talking and discussion.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Train the students’ listening ability.

2.Make the students master the sentence patterns and describe the pictures freely.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to improve the students’ speaking ability.

Teaching Methods:

1.Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through with the listening materials.

2.Individual,pair of group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.a tape recorder

2.the multimedia

3.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings and Lead-in

T:Good morning/afternoon,everyone.

Ss:Good morning/afternoon,Mr/Ms.

T:Sit down,please.First I want to ask you some questions.Have you been to some places of interest?Have you climbed the mountains?

Ss:Yes.(Students may have different answers.)

T:How can you get there?

Ss:We can get to…by bus/by train/on foot…

T:Now please look at the screen.

(The teacher shows a picture of a wheelchair on the screen.)

How do you say it in English?

Ss:Wheelchair.

T:What kind of people uses it?

Ss:People with disabilities/who couldn’t stand up.

T:Good.Now,tell me if you were in a wheelchair,would you be able to get to some places like tall buildings,high mountains?

Ss:I can go to…by myself,because there’s no step.It’s easy for me to get there.

T:Who has different answers?

S1:I can go to…with the help of my friends.They can carry me up there.

S2:I can’t go to…,because it’s high on the top of the hill.What a pity!I can only look at it from far away.

Step Ⅱ Warming up

T:Today we’re going to learn Unit 17“Disabilities”.(Bb:Unit 17 Disabilities The First Period)

First let’s look at some words.

(Show the following on the screen)

disability n.

ability n.

sidewalk n.

escalator n.

elevator n.(=lift)

(Teacher teaches the words and explains them,then let the students look at the first four pictures on Page 49.)

T:OK.Now I want you to discuss the first four pictures using the following sentences.

1.Sentence Patterns:

(1)If I were in a wheelchair,I would…

(2)If I were blind,I wouldn’t…

(Write them on the blackboard)

Yeah,please discuss them in groups of four.After a while,everyone is asked to talk about the pictures.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Please work in groups and try to imagine what difficulties and dangers you might face.

(After a while,teacher asks some students to talk about the pictures.If time permits,teacher may ask more students to answer.)

T:Now time is up.Who wants to say first?

S1:Picture 1.If I were in a wheelchair,I would not go to the public buildings because there were so many steps.

S2:Picture 2.If I were blind,I might fall down when walking on the sidewalk as it’s not flat.

(Or:There are some blocks.)

S3:Picture 3.If I were disabled,I wouldn’t go to the toilet,for the equipments are not fit for the disabled.

S4:Picture 4.If I were in a wheelchair.I couldn’t ring in public places,because the public telephone is too high for me to reach.

T:How hard they are!We pay little attention to them in our daily life.We must take effective measures to improve their conditions.Let’s see what changes have taken place.Please discuss in groups.In the meanwhile,we should notice the two phrases:deal with,overcome the difficulties.(Teacher writes the following on the blackboard.)

2.(1)deal with

e.g.How shall we deal with the problem?

(2)overcome the difficulties

(After a while,teacher asks some students to talk about the last four pictures.)

T:Now.Any volunteer?

S1:We should provide an entrance suitable for wheelchairs on the ground floor.

S2:We should build a special sidewalk for the blind,and fix some feeling equipment.

S3:We must provide suitable toilets for people with disabilities,fixing two handrails.

S4:We should set the public telephone in a proper place so that people in a wheelchair can reach it.

T:They hope to lead a normal life as we do,so we should help them overcome the difficulties.

Step Ⅲ Listening

T:Now please turn to Page 50.Let’s do some listening.You are going to hear John talking about his life.There are three questions for you to answer.You need to listen carefully.Is that clear?

S:Yes.

T:OK.Let’s begin.

(Teacher plays the tape for the first time.Then play for the second time.During this time,teacher may pause for students to write down the information.Play some parts of the tape more times if necessary.Finally teacher checks the answers with the whole class.)

Step Ⅳ Speaking

T:Please look at Speaking on Page 50.Now imagine you are disabled.Choose two of the situations below and discuss how you would deal with them.You may use the following sentence structures.

(Show the structures on the screen.)

I probably couldn’t…

I’m sure I would be able to…

If I…,I would be able to…

I would need help to…

It would be difficult to…

I would try to…

T:OK.Please begin to discuss them.

(Teacher goes among the students and listens to their discussions,then chooses several students to express their ideas in different ways.)

Who can describe Situation 1?

S1:I’ll try.If I were blind,it would be difficult for me to get there.But I would try my best.First I would walk down the familiar sidewalk with the aid of a walking stick.When crossing the street,I would ask others for help.Or I probably could get there by taxi.

S2:Situation 2.If I were deaf,I would not be able to hear other players’ words.It would be difficult for us to work together.I would have to read their facial expressions and gestures.

I think I’m more lucky than Helen Keller,for I can see.I should learn her spirit of studying,and try to imitate by looking at their mouths.I’m sure I would learn English well.

S3:Situation 3.If I were in a wheelchair,I’m sure I would be able to go shopping,eat at a fast food restaurant and then go to a cinema with the help of my friends.First I would do my best to get to the steps of the building by myself,and then they could carry me up to the entrance of the lift.I’m sure I would be able to get there and have a good time.

Step Ⅴ Summary and Homework

T:In this class,we’ve done some listening and speaking.We’ve also talked about the situations of the disabled.Of course,we’ve learned some useful sentence patterns.After class,practise more talking about disability in English.Master the useful sentence patterns,(Teacher points to the blackboard.)and preview the reading material“Disabled?Not me!”.So much for today.Goodbye,everyone!

Step Ⅵ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 17 Disabilities

The First Period

1.Sentence Patterns:

(1)If I were in a wheelchair,I would…

(2)If I were blind,I wouldn’t…

2.(1)deal with

e.g.How shall we deal with the problem?

(2)overcome the difficulties

The Second Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the following words and expressions:get around(=get about),fair,guidance,gifted,assist,cooperate,recognition,sympathy,encouragement,productive,visual,impair,motivate,disappointing,adjust to,get used to

2.Train the students’ reading ability.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students’ reading ability.

2.Enable the students to understand the text better.

3.How to get the students to master the useful expressions.

Teaching Difficult Points:

Master the following sentence structures:

1.…studying together with their disabled classmates is both challenging and rewarding. Living with disability is frustrating and challenging.

2.I am and get used to the fact that while I may not be…

Teaching Methods:

1.Discussion to help the students know something about the disabled.

2.Fast reading to get the general idea of the text.

3.Questioning-and-answering activity to help the students go through the whole passage.

4.Pair work or individual work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.a tape recorder

2.a multimedia

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings and Revision

(Greet the whole class as usual.)

T:Yesterday we learned what difficulties and dangers the disabled might face and how to help them in our daily life.Imagine you are disabled.Who’d like to describe the situation(If you were blind/deaf etc.)and tell us how you would deal with them.

S:I’ll try.…

(All the others listen carefully.)

T:Well done.No matter what difficulties he may meet with,we all hope he can enjoy himself.

Step Ⅱ Lead-in and Pre-reading

T:Yeah.We know people with disabilities may have lots of difficulties in their lives,but many of them are determined.They can overcome any difficulty.Please look at the three questions on the screen and discuss them in groups.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.Do you know anyone who is disabled?

How does he or she deal with the disability?

2.Do you know of any famous people who are disabled?What do they do?

3.Should disabled students be allowed to go to college?Should they get any extra help?Why or why not?

(Teacher gives students five minutes to discuss and collects their answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.Yes.I know a person with disability.He has learnt to do many things without help.He can take care of himself at home,but getting around in the city in a wheelchair is often frustrated.He loves reading stories of young disabled people who have overcome great difficulties.

2.Yes,I do.Beethoven was a great musician,Helen Keller was a great American writer,and Zhang Haidi is also a writer.

3.Yes,they should.Because there are many gifted disabled students,they can make a contribution to the society.

They should get some extra help in their everyday activities.

No,they shouldn’t.Because they need recognition,more than sympathy and help.

Step Ⅲ Reading

T:OK.Today we’ll read a text “Disabled?Not me!”and know something more about it.I think you are interested in it.Please turn to Page 17.Read the passage quickly to get the general idea and answer the questions on the screen.

(Teacher shows the questions on the screen.)

1.What’s the trouble of Zhong Xiaowen?

2.How does she get around?

3.What’s the teachers’ aim in the special college?

4.What do the articles in Literature of Chinese Blind Children talk about?

5.How does Zijie like the magazine?

(Teacher gives students enough time to read the text and collects their answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.Xiaowen was born without the ability to use her legs and she has no feeling below the waist.

2.She uses a wheelchair to get around.

3.Their aim is to help disabled students understand that they can play a valuable role within society.

4.The articles are often about disabled people who have overcome challenges and difficulties and learnt to live a meaningful and productive life.

5.He loves the magazine very much.He thinks it is very important for them to know that someone far away is also struggling as they are.

T:Now read the passage again and try to get as much information as you can.

Step Ⅳ Study for Language Points

T:Now you’ve known the general idea of the passage.Please look at the screen.I’ll explain something to you.

(Show the following on the screen.)

a.treat vt. treat sb. well(badly)

e.g.Don’t treat me as a child.

Which doctors are treating her for her illness?

b.ability n. the ability to do,a man of ability

e.g.Man has the ability to speak.

c.make a contribution to

e.g.We must do something useful and make a contribution to our country.

d.launch vt.

①launch a man-made satellite

②launch a new enterprise

③launch threats against sb.

e.play a …role(in,within)

e.g.He played a leading role in a film.

f.both…and…

e.g.Both you and I are students.

He both fears and hates at once.

g.…studying together with their disabled classmates is both challenging and rewarding.

Living with disability is frustrating and challenging.

In these two sentences,gerundial phrases are used as subject.

e.g.Working with him is a great pleasure.

h.…I am and get used to the fact that while…Here that-clause is used as appositive clause,expressing the fact.

e.g.The fact that he came here was known to us all.

(Write important phrases and difficult sentences on the blackboard.)

T:(After explaining the language points.)

Do you have anything you don’t understand?If you have,please tell me,I’ll be glad to have a discussion with you.

(The teacher answers the questions raised by the students.)

Step Ⅴ Listening and Consolidation

T:Let’s listen to the tape.I’ll play the tape twice.When I first play it,just listen.When I play it for the second time,listen and repeat it.Are you clear about it?

(The teacher plays the tape for the students to listen and repeat.While the students read,the teacher goes among the students to correct the students’ mistakes in pronunciation,intonation and stress.)

T:Now turn to Page 52.There are five questions for you to answer in Post-reading.Try to find the answers in the text.Discuss in groups of four,and then I’ll ask some of you to read your answers.

(A few minutes later.)

T:Are you ready?

Ss:Yes.

T:Now let’s begin.

S1:They have to use wheelchairs to get around and it often takes them a little longer to do everyday things,such as getting out of bed,getting dressed and going to class.

S2:They not only learn how to assist disabled people,but also learn the importance of cooperating to reach their goals in life.

S3:They help disabled students to understand that they can play a valuable role within society,and inspire many of them to believe that they can realize their dreams.

S4:Today there are more opportunities like the special Olympics for disabled people to develop their potential,live a richer life and make a contribution to society.

Because people understand that they can play a valuable role within society,and that they need recognition,more than sympathy and help.

S5:People must make sure that all of us should have equal access to all areas and facilities.People should treat me fairly.

Step Ⅵ Summary and Homework

T:Today we have learned the passage-Disabled?Not me!From the success of the disabled student-Zhong Xiaowen,we learn something important.There is nothing difficult in the world if you stick to it.When you meet with difficulty in your life and study,please don’t lose heart.On the other hand,we should help the students to know how to help the disabled in our daily life.

And we also learn some phrases.After class,you should work hard and master them.

Step Ⅶ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 17 Disabilities

The Second Period

1.Important Phrases:

treat sb.,the ability to do,make a contribution to launch,play a …role,both…and…,get used to

2.Difficult Sentences:

…I am and get used to the fact that while…

I may not be able to walk,there are many other great things I can do.

The Third Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the words and phrases learned in the last two periods.

2.Learn and master Direct and Indirect Objects.

Teaching Important Points:

1.How to guess the missing word according to the given sentence.

2.Master the interchanges of position on direct and indirect objects in the sentence.

Teaching Difficult Point:

Master the changes of the prepositions in the interchanges of direct and indirect objects.

Teaching Methods:

1.Review method to consolidate the words learned in the last two periods.

2.Explanation and inductive methods to make the students master the interchanges of direct and indirect objects.

3.Individual,pair work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the blackboard

2.the multimedia

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Word Study

T:In the last two periods,we have learned something about disabilities.As we all know,we shouldn’t look down upon the disabled.We should help and respect them.And we must make life easier for them.All these include some useful and important words and phrases.Now let’s review them.Open your books and turn to Page 53.Look at Word Study.Part 1:Fill in the blanks with the right words.Part 2:Use the correct form of the words in the box to describe the following things or people.You are given ten minutes to do them.Read first,then fill in them according to the meaning of each sentence.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.First do it by yourself.Then discuss them in pairs.After a while,I’ll ask some students to read the words.

(Teacher goes among the students and the students begin to do it.After a while,teacher checks their answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.①waist ②guidance

③sympathy ④physical

⑤potential ⑥gifted

⑦meaningful ⑧limit

⑨overcome ⑩adjust

2.①frustrated ②challenging

③disabled ④motivated

⑤encouraged ⑥disappointed

⑦rewarding

Step Ⅲ Grammar Study

T:Now I want you to translate two sentences into English.Look at the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.请把盐递给我。

2.请给我们演奏一些民间乐曲。

T:Here I tell you how to say“民间乐曲”in English-folk music.Now can you translate the two sentences?Who wants to try?Yeah,Zhao Nan,you try the first one,please.

S1:Pass me the salt,please.

T:Good,sit down,please.Now we can also say:Pass the salt to me,please.

(Write the two sentences on the blackboard.)

Now the second one.Who wants to try?OK.Peter,you try,please.

S2:Play us some folk music,please.

S3:We can also say:Play some folk music for us,please.

T:Very good,sit down,please.

(Write the two sentences on the blackboard.)

Look at the blackboard,the verbs“play”and“pass”are followed by two objects.In English,there are some verbs that can be followed by two objects.Who can tell us what they are?

S4:I’ll try.They are send,buy,get…

T:Right.You’ve known some of the verbs.Now I’ll give you a summary.Please look at the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

Common verbs that take indirect objects:

①give,show,send,bring,offer,read,pass,lend,leave,hand,tell,return,write,pay,throw,wish,teach,promise,owe,refuse ect.

e.g.I’ll lend you something to read.

Remember to write us a note when you get there.

②make,buy,do,fetch,get,play,save,order,cook,sing,find ect.

e.g.I hope you’ll do me a favour.

Let’s get the children something to drink.

T:Now please notice there are two groups in the diagram.In Group 1,most of the indirect objects are transformed into “to-phrase”.And in Group 2,most of the indirect objects are transformed into “for-phrase”.

(Write the following on the blackboard.)

Compare:

Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:But not all the indirect objects can be replaced like this.

e.g.“Do me a favour”.We can’t transform it into:“Do a favour for me.”

OK.Now let’s do some exercises.Open your books and turn to Page 54.Look at Grammar-Direct and Indirect Objects.Look at Part 1.Tick the right answer.First do it by yourselves.Then discuss it in pairs.Finally I’ll show you the answers.

(After students finish it,teacher shows the following on the screen.)

Suggested answers:

1.√Because his mother bought him a computer.

√Because his mother bought a computer for him.

2.√Do me a favour.Please lend me one 珁uan.

3.√Please take these exercise-books to my office.

4.√Give me the check,please.

√Please give the check to me.

T:OK.In fact,we should pay attention to some special cases.Especially when the direct object is shorter than the indirect object,or when we emphasize the indirect object,we often use such patterns,“Subject+Predicate+Direct Object+to/for+Indirect Object”.

e.g.I took it to the policeman on duty.

Mother bought the ice-cream for you,not for me.

(Write them on the blackboard.)

And there are two special cases you should notice.

Please look at the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.We must use prepositions before the indirect object following the two verbs “explain and suggest”.

e.g.Could you explain your point of view to us?

I suggest a way out to her.

2.Some verbs are followed by either direct object or indirect object,or both of them.

e.g.I asked John.

I asked a question.

I asked John a question.

The similar verbs are:teach,tell,owe,pay,show

As to this,you should remember them.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Let’s deal with Part 2.

(Teacher begins to read the following and explains it if necessary.Summer is coming.You decide to have a different vacation this year.Use the words in brackets to explain what you will do differently this summer.)

Now you are given five minutes to do it.First do it by yourself.Then discuss it in pairs.Now please begin.

(Teacher goes among the students to check their writing and explains some new words that students meet with and ask.As to some difficult sentences,teacher and students can discuss together.At last,teacher shows the answers on the screen.)

Suggested answers:

1.This summer,I want to make my parents less trouble by staying at home.

2.This summer my grandpa wants to buy some books for me.

3.This summer my friends want to send short messages to me.

4.This summer my aunt and uncle want to bring candy to me when they come to visit.

5.This summer I want to teach English to my 6-year-old niece.

Step Ⅳ Practice

(The teacher shows the following on the screen)

Change the position of the direct object and indirect object in the following sentences.

1.I’ll lend you some.

2.He gave his wife a camera for Christmas.

3.We’re going to sing some songs for the heroes.

4.Bring me the book.

5.She made a coat for me.

6.He bought flowers for his teacher.

T:Look at the screen.Let’s practise the interchanges of the direct and indirect object.

(Give the students several minutes to practise them,then teacher may check their practice.)

Suggested answers:

1.I’ll lend some to you.

2.He gave a camera to his wife for Christmas.

3.We’re going to sing the heroes some songs.

4.Bring the book to me.

5.She made me a coat.

6.He bought his teacher flowers.

Step Ⅴ Summary and Homework

T:In this class,we’ve reviewed some new words and mainly done some exercises about direct and indirect objects.After class,review the content,and remember the verbs that can be followed by double objects.Today’s homework:Preview the integrating skills.That’s all for today.Goodbye,everyone.

Step Ⅵ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 17 Disabilities

The Third Period

Direct and Indirect Object

1.Pass me the salt,please.

→Pass the salt to me,please.

Play us some folk music,please.

→Play some folk music for us,please.

2.Compare:

3.“Subject+Predicate+Direct Object+to/for+Indirect Object”

e.g.I took it to the policeman on duty.

Mother bought the ice-cream for you,not for me.

The Fourth Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit by making sentences with them.

2.Review the common verbs that take indirect objects.

3.Train the students’ integrating skills by reading and writing.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students’ reading ability by reading the material.

2.Improve the students’ writing ability.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to improve the students’ integrating skills-reading skill and writing skill.

Teaching Methods:

1.Fast-reading and reading to improve the students’ reading ability.

2.Practice and pair work or group work to have every student master what they’ve learned.

Teaching Aids:

1.a tape recorder

2.the multimedia

3.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings and Revision

(Greet the whole class as usual.)

T:Yesterday we learned the grammar-Direct and Indirect Objects.We know there are some verbs that can be followed by objects.Who can tell us what they are?

S1:They are “give,show,send,read,lend…”.

S2:And “make,buy,do,get…”.

T:Right.Sit down,please.We should also notice the usage of “to” and “for” when we interchange them.

Step Ⅱ Test

T:In this unit we have also learned some useful expressions.Have you remembered them?

S:Yes.

T:OK.Now let’s review them together.I speak Chinese,you speak English.

(Teacher writes the following on the blackboard when students say them.)

share with,treat…as,deal with,the ability to do,play a…role,realize one’s dream,get around,adjust to

T:Now I’ll give you a test to see whether you’ve mastered them or not.Look at the screen,please.

(Show the following on the screen.)

Complete the sentences using the expressions on the blackboard.

1.I__________my lunch__________(分享) him yesterday.

2.The police__________his death__________(把……看作) a case of murder.

3.How shall we__________(处理) the problem?

4.The boy has__________(有能力) solve the difficult problem.

5.The teacher__________(起重要作用) in teaching.

6.In order to__________(实现梦想),they worked day and night.

7.The policemen__________(四处走动) and tried to find the thief.

8.It will take you some time to__________(适应) the new surroundings.

Suggested answers:

1.shared,with 2.treated,as

3.deal with 4.the ability to

5.plays an important role 6.realize their dreams

7.got around 8.adjust to

Step Ⅲ Fast Reading

T:We’ve learned something about disabilities.They hope to lead a normal life as we do,so we should provide more opportunities for the disabled to develop their potential,and let them live a richer life and make a contribution to society.We should help them overcome the difficulties.

Today we’re going to read a material“The special Olympics”.Please turn to Page 55.Read the text fast and try to get the general idea.

Step Ⅳ Reading

T:Now read the text again.Read it carefully and discuss the following questions on the screen with your partner.Write your answers on a piece of paper.In a few minutes,I’ll ask some pairs to give us the answers.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

Answer the following questions:

1.How often is the Special Olympics held?

2.Why do many Special Olympics athletes think that “taking part in the Games is a victory”?

3.How do events like the Special Olympics help mentally disabled people?

4.Where was the first Special Olympics held?

5.Why do you think the Special Olympics are becoming more popular?

6.When will the Special Olympics be held in Shanghai?

(The teacher goes among the students,joins in the students’ discussion and answers the students’ questions.)

(A few minutes later.)

T:Have you finished?(Ss:Yes.)Give us your answers,please.One student,one question.Any volunteer?

S1:1.Every two years.

S2:2.Because each athlete had to train for many years and overcome fear and hardship to reach the Games.For them,winning isn’t to be the first one across the finish line or scoring the most goals,but the best you can be.

S3:3.By preparing for and participating in the Special Olympics,mentally disabled children and adults can develop their ability to move,improve their health and gain greater self-confidence.The Special Olympics is also a good way to make friends.

S4:4.In Chicago.

S5:5.Because interest in the Special Olympics has spread across the world and many cities are now competing for the honour to host the event.

S6:6.In .

T:Now look at the screen again.I’ll explain some words and expressions of the text so that you can use them freely.Please listen to me carefully.

1.every two years=every second(other)year

e.g.He comes here every three days/every third day.

2.Athletes at the Special Olympics are fighters in more than one way.

e.g.The travel to Beijing is more than sightseeing.

He has more than twenty yuan with him.

3.fail vi. & vt.

e.g.I failed in persuading(to persuade)him.

Don’t fail to ring me up.

Time failed me to finish my talk.

4.consider +n./pron./doing

e.g.He is considering changing his job.

consider+sb.+(to be)+n./adj.

e.g.They considered themselves very important.

5.participate=take part vi.

e.g.I participated(took part)in the game.

6.compete in;compete in a race;compete for;compete with sb. for sth.

e.g.Cities in the world are now competing for the honour to host the Olympic Games.

T:Do you have anything else you don’t understand?If you have,please tell me.I’ll be glad to have a discussion with you.

(The teacher answers any questions asked by the students.)

Step Ⅴ Listening and Reading Aloud

T:Let’s listen to the tape.When I play it for the first time,just listen to it.When I play it for the second time,please listen and repeat.Then read the text aloud.Are you clear about it?

S:Yes.

(The teacher plays the tape for the students to listen.Then when the students read the text,the teacher goes among the students and corrects the students’ mistakes in pronunciation,intonation and stress.)

Step Ⅵ Practice

T:Now let’s do an exercise.You should do it like this:try to find useful expressions in the text and make sentences with them in groups of four.One student,one sentence.Do it by turns.Are you clear about it?

S:Yes.

(A few minutes later)

T:Now I’ll ask some students to make sentences.One sentence at a time.S1,please give us your sentence.

S1:I’ll make a sentence with the phrase“every four years”.

The Olympic Games is held every four years.

T:Please go on.

S2:fail to do

He failed to pass the English exam.

S3:more than

More than one person has made the suggestion.

S4:consider

We don’t consider Tom to be our best friend.

S5:take part/participate

All the students took part/participated in the sports meeting in our school.

S6:compete

He competed with other players for the champion.

Step Ⅶ Writing

T:Now you’ve known something about disabilities.I think many students will show their love to the disabled from now on.What should we do to help them in our daily life?

S7:If we are organizing an event,we must imagine that people with disabilities may want to come to it.So we must make sure that they can enter and use all parts of the building.

S8:When we design a building,we should provide an entrance suitable for wheelchairs on the ground floor,as well as lifts,suitable bathrooms and toilets.We must also make sure that signs are clear and easy to read.

S9:…

T:OK.It’s very kind of you!After class,please conduct a survey of the public places where you live in.Start with your school:how easy or difficult is it for a disabled person to get around?Visit other public buildings and find out if they are accessible or not.Work in pairs or groups and make a checklist for your survey.Use the results to write an essay.Describe the current situation and suggest ways to improve the situation.

Suggested writing:

After several days’ survey,I found that the government paid a little attention to the disabled and spend much money on new buildings.There is no special road for the blind.The buildings have many steps,and it’s difficult for the disabled to get into them.

A new government programme has been designed to help disabled people.More special schools will be built.Not only will help be given to people to find jobs,but also medical treatment will be provided for people who need it.But the truth is that everyone should take care of disabled people,not just the government.If everyone shows love to them,their life will be much better.

Step Ⅷ Summary and Homework

T:In this class,we’ve reviewed the useful expressions and learned the text“The Special Olympics”.We practise how to write the article on disabilities.After class,go over all the important points learnt in this unit,and write an essay.Prepare for next unit.Class is over.

Step Ⅸ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 17 Disabilities

The Fourth Period

Important Phrases:

share with,treat…as,deal with,the ability to do,play a…role,realize one’s dream,get around,adjust to

Record after Teaching

篇12：高二英语Unit 16(全)(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

一. 教材分析

㈠. 教学内容

本单元的中心话题是 “美国” ,课文围绕 “美国南部” 及 “美洲平原上的野牛” 展开, 让人感受美国的变迁过程. 本单元有助于培养学生跨文化交际意识,进一步拓宽视野,为终身学习奠定良好的基础.

“热身”(Warming up)部分, 给我们提供了三幅画面,有利于我们从宏观上和微观上把握美国地理特征.练习题引导学生从美国的历史渊源,经济等方面认识美国,有利于学生的探究学习.

“听力”(Listening) 部分设置了三个练习,由浅到深,层层深入. 练习1不仅有利于我们了解纽约市,而且有利于培养学生在听力中快速捕捉信息的能力. 练习2 和3有助于学生了解美国的背景知识,丰富学生的文化内涵.

“口语”(Speaking)部分要求学生根据提示描述一个场所.题目设置贴近学生生活. 教师除了课本所提示的说明处,还可以引导学生描述自己的学校.

“读前”(Pre-reading) 部分设计了两个练习.练习1要求学生列一份自己家乡的年表,并列出重要的事件以及变化过程,讨论其前因后果. 练习2 要求学生在年表上填写美国历史上发生的五件大事, 这有利于训练学生的逻辑思维能力,为阅读有关美国历史的课文做准备.

“阅读”(Reading)部分 “美国南部” (The American South), 介绍了南部------一部充满灾难的历史, 同时也是一部充满成功与希望的历史.文章重点介绍了美国南部佐治亚亚特兰大市自内战以来的发展和变化. 着重阐述了反对种族隔离制度斗争的美国民权运动, 及其杰出的领袖马丁.路德.金的斗争精神. 通过阅读这篇文章可以了解,美国是个多民族的多元文化国家. 由于文章涉及美国历史的变化, 城市的发展, 需要对比的手法描写, 本篇文章可称得上是一篇对比性写作的范文.

“读后”(Post-reading)部分练习1有利于学生通过实例来阐明观点. 练习2 要求学生进行两人小组讨论或者多人小组讨论, 题目强调了语篇意识,设置层次性强,有利于培养学生的思辨能力.

“语言学习”(Language Study)部分包含词汇和语法两部份. 词汇学习涉及构词法知识,设计新颖,看似简单,其实灵活, 有助于学生留意某些词加后缀时意义的变化, 有利于避免负迁移. 语法练习2考察学生在语篇中使用非限定动词的能力, 注重学生综合素质的提高.

“综合技能”(Integrating Skills)部分包含阅读和写作. 通过阅读 “美洲平原上的野牛” , 人们了解了美国历史上大规模屠宰野牛,破坏美洲草原生物链的教训. 写作部分要求学生写一封电子邮件, 帮助美国学生了解中国.这就需要学生在理解教材的基础上,从面积,人口,语言,民族,重要城市等方面比较美国于中国的区别.这项任务有利于提高学生的语言运用能力.特别是语言概括能力.

“学习建议”(Tips)部分指导要求学生开展写对比分析文章,以及学生写作时要注意的相关事项.

“复习要点”(Check points) 通过练习引导学生对非限定动词作一次小结,并对要求学生对描述处所的词汇进行一次小结,有利于培养学生的自学能力.

㈡. 教学目标

1．语言知识

词汇：entry mental physical suffering greedy trader unemployment unrest sacrifice reconstruction former funeral dawn overcome insist plain resist chief afterwards widespread rot wildlife supply chain willing in vain take a chance leave alone insist on put on on sale in turn

语法：复习非限定动词

I don’t mind his being invited.

He hate being laughing at

She enjoys being interviewed.

It is important for lost time to be made up.

功能：描绘场所

What does your hometown look like ?

What does the landscape look like ?

Are there ? There is in the north.

How long/wide/high/tall is the….?

It’s .. metres / feet long /wide/high/tall.

It looks like …….

2．语言技能

听：听两段有关NY的短文，捕捉信息，改正错

说：用恰当的语言描述一个地方

读：掌握skimming scanning generalization taking notes 等微阅读技能。能欣赏对比性写作的文章

写：采用对比性手法写一段文章。

㈢. 教学重点和难点

重点：课文中出现的重要单词和词组的用法如：

insist on / leave alone / supply / be determined to do / be forced to do/resist

非谓语形式的用法

难点：采用对比性手法写作

非谓语形式用作定语的区别

二．课时安排和教学思路

本单元的中心话题是美国。我们将本单元的学习设计成从美国的东部经南部到西部的一次文化旅行。从美国的概况，东部城市（纽约和 Ellis Island），南部城市（Atlanta），和西部大草原（bison）来了解美国，感受美国的变迁过程。。

Period 1 Warming up &speaking

本节课从一个“猜猜她是哪个国家”的游戏导入。接着通过美国地图和一张表格来了解她的概况。然后是一组图片（包括著名的城市和人物），目的是为听力和阅读做铺垫，降低难度。再做一个对错小测试，增加学生对美国的了解。根据游戏的做法进入口语部分。要求学生写一小段文字描述一个场所，用上useful expression, 让其他学生猜猜是哪里。在写之前先造句，掌握常用句型Are there…? There is …..in the north ..。It is ….metres/ feet long/wide/ high/tall…. It looks like …..

Period 2 Listening &Reading

本节课的中心话题是东部城市纽约和 Ellis Island，通过听力和阅读两个环节完成。先从图片引出纽约城，进入听力。她是美国甚至世界重要的城市，有必要增加一些信息量所以要求学生再阅读一段短文（从高三阅读文章中摘出3小段），增加信息量。通过几个对错判断来检查学生的理解程度。

Period 3&4 Reading

首先播放两小段视频。一是描述美国南部过去灾难和战争的《飘》，另一个是展现Atlanta的现代与富裕。两者形成鲜明对比，自然导入本节课的学习内容。Skimming通过回答问题了解文章的篇章结构和中心内容。Scanning细节理解，主要是通过完成表格，来对比Atlanta的今天和昨天，突出文章重点(明白Atlanta为什么是典型的南部城市及她又克服了哪些困难才成为一个现代的大都市)及对比性写作的特点。听完课文录音后，要求学生完成一个任务设计，编一段对话。。假设你是一个历史系的学生来到Atlanta旅行，你的笔友带你参观Atlanta，你们一起讨论Atlanta的过去和现在。通过对话编写来检查学生对课文的理解掌握，复习所学的内容。最后拓展思维，不同文化背景的人生活在一个城市里，有何好处和不利之处。

Period 5 Language study

由听写导入复习部分词汇。然后复习构词法。接着是复习非谓语的被动形式。最后通过选择题全面检查学生对这语法项目的掌握情况。

Period 6 Integrating Skill

由bison的图片导入阅读文章。通过回答问题。细节理解，对错判断。完成图表，来了解美国西部历史上大规模屠宰野牛,破坏美洲草原生物链的教训.。最后是写作任务。采用对比手法，帮助美国学生了解你的家乡。

三．教学反思

本单元的话题是美国，着重引导学生注意美国历史的变迁。其实美国的文化，建筑，地理特征，名胜古迹，民间传说，民俗特色，政权形式，科学成就都很值得老师引导学生去了解，这对学好英语是有很大的帮助的。尤其是能够体会领悟美国的社会特征和人文特点，在学生阅读文章时就能够减少好多障碍。但是内容涉及很广，我们不可能在一个单元的时间内让学生都了解，但是应当鼓励学生上网或去图书馆查阅资料，自主学习。同时也应该提醒学生思考中国和美国这两个国家的相似的地方和不同的地方，做一些比较。

四．教学程序

Teaching plan for Unit 16

Period 1 Warming up & Speaking

Goals:1. Learn about the USA

2.Practise describing places to train the speaking ability

Step 1 Lead-in

T：Now, let’s begin our class. First, I’ll give you some information about the history of a country. Please guess which country it is. Listen carefully. It is a very young country in the world, which has only a history of 200~300 years. There is a Statue of Liberty in the east coast. It is about 46 metres high. The head office of the UN was set up there. Two World Wars didn’t take place there. Now it is the strongest country of the world. Can you guess it?

Ss: Yes. The USA.

Step 2 Warming up

1. Show the map of the U.S.A and help the Ss to get a general idea of her.

Full name

Location

Capital city

The largest city

When was founded

population

2. The U.S.A is a beautiful country. There are many beautiful cities and also great people. Let’s see some pictures. Do you know sth about them?

(George Washington . The first president

Martin Luther King the leader of non-demonstration was killed in 1968

New York the largest city nick name

Atlanta in the south the host of the Olympic Game in

Ellis Island Island of Tears)

3. What else have you known about her ? A quiz (Ex1.)

4. What do you want to know ?

Step 3 Speaking

1. Learn the useful expression. Make a sentence with each pattern.

How long /wide/high/tall is ….?

It’s …metres/feet long/wide/high/tall.

There is …in the north/south/east/west.

It looks like….

2. Write a short passage to describe a place.

3. Play the Guess game.

One student read his short article , the others guess where it is.

Home work: Search the internet to find information about New York.

Period 2 Listening &Reading( about New York and Ellis Island )

Goal: 1.Do some listening to improve the listening ability.

2. Learn more about New York

Step 1 Lead-in

Show a picture of NY.

T: Can you guess when the picture was taken?(it was taken before the date September 11,.)How do you know?(Because in the picture, we can see many skyscrapers. Among them, the World Trade Centre and the Empire State Building are most famous, but now the World Trade Centre has already gone. It was exploded by terrorists.)

Step 2. Listening

1. T: Now let’s listen to a radio programme about New York to help Wang Xiao correct the errors in her notes. Turn to the next page. Let’s look at Ex.1 in the listening part. Here are the notes taken by Wang Xiao after he listens to a radio programme about New York. First read it by yourself. Then I’ll play the tape for you to listen. After that, please correct his errors.

Do EX1

2.T:OK.Now let’s listen to the tape again and then answer some concerned questions. Before listening, you need to go through with the questions.(Teacher gives the students one minute to read the questions. Then play the tape for the second time. After that, give the students enough time to discuss the answers and check them.)

3.T:Well done. Please listen to Part 2 of the listening material and then choose the best answers to the question in Ex.3.

(Teacher deals with Ex.3 in the same way. If necessary, play the tape again.)

Step.3 Reading

Now let’s know more about NY by read the following material. (adapted from SB3 Lesson 49)

New York

New York is built on a group of islands on the east coast of the USA at a point where several rivers flow into the ocean. The first westerner to discover these islands was Italian explorer in 1524. In 1626 the island of Manhattan was bought from local Indians, Native Americans, for a handful of goods worth about $24. Today Native Americans express their anger over this business deal. After the War of Independence ended, New York became the capital of the USA for a short time (1789--90) before Washington, D.C.

The building of skyscrapers in New York began around the year 1900. Because Manhattan Island is made of solid rock, it is safe to build very tall buildings. A 55-stored building went up in 1913 , and in 1931 the Empire State Building was completed., then the tallest building in the world. It has 102 storeys and 73 lifts. From the top of it, you could see up to a distance of 130 kilometres on a clear day. Today it is no longer the tallest building in the USA, or even in New York. The World trade Centre , an office building for over 1200 firms employing about 50,000 people, is even higher at 411 metres. The twins towers are 110 storeys high, but high-speed lifts controlled by computer take only a minute to reach the top. The towers are further apart at the top than at the base, but this is no mistake. This is because the surface of the earth is not flat but round. But unfortunately the twin towers were destroyed by terrorist attack on Sep11,2001. …….

New York never sleeps. The underground railway runs 24 hours a day, and there are all –night cinemas, bars and restaurants. Some people think that the weather is unpleasant, the city ugly and dirty, the competition fierce and the streets unsafe. It is a city in a hurry, but a very exciting place to be.

True or False

1.New York is built on an island on the east coast of the USA.

2.These islands were first discovered by an Italian explorer in 1524.

3. New York became the capital of the USA for a short time after Washington, D.C.

4.About a century ago the building of skyscrapers began in New York.

5.Skyscrapers were mainly built on Manhattan Island.

6. Because of a careless mistake, the twin towers of the World Trade Center are further apart at the top than at the base.

Home work: Search the internet to find information about the south of the USA

Period 3&4 Reading.

Goal: 1.learn about the American south.

2. Improve the reading ability

3. Learn and master the following:

suffering unemployment depression reconstruction burn down

aim at in honor of in vain take a chance overcome

be determined to do

step 1 lead-in

1.Play the video of the film “gone with the wind, let the Ss know the hard past of the south

2.Play another video about the city of Atlanta, show the modern and rich of the south

3.Let the Ss know how difference they are. Then tell them they will learn about the history of the south

step 2 Pre-reading

Put the events below in the correct place on the timeline.

30,000 years ago 1600 1861 1930s 1960s

1. the American Civil War 2.The great Depression

3.The Civil Rights Movement 4.The arrival of Native American

5.The arrival of European settlers

Step 3 Skimming(get a general idea of the passage)

Ask the Ss to answer the following questions.

1. What kind of story is the story of the south?

2. Which city is the typical southern city.?

Step 4. Scanning (Get specific ideas )

Ask Ss to read the passage carefully again and make it clear why Atlanta is a typical southern city.

Try to finish the chart below

Why Atlanta is a typical southern city ?

The past In the war

The difficulties the people of Atlanta had to overcome after the war 1. economical _________________

2. political __________

today The success in 1996

Modern Atlanta

Step5 Listening and consolidation

Ask Ss to listen to the tape to get more information

After that, work in pairs to make up a dialogue.

.Task:

A Chinese college student who studies history came to Atlanta for a trip. His pen friend showed him around the city They talked about the history and development of the city.

Step 6 Further understanding(discuss in groups)People of many different background live and work together in Atlanta .What are the advantages of living together with people who are different from you ? Are there any disadvantages?

Homework : Read the passage again and try to

Period 5 Language study.

Goal: 1.Review the new words appearing in the last period.

2.Do some exercises using the rules of word formation

3. Review Non-finite Verbs

Step 1 Word study

1. have a dictation.

( former, greedy, mental, physical, wide spread, chief )

Then do Ex3on page 45

2. About the word formation

Do Ex 2& EX1

Step 2 Grammar---Review Nonfinite Verbs(2)

1..: look at the sentences on the screen.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

It is impossible that lost time can be made up.

2.Rules are made so that they can not be broken.

3.I don’t mind their inviting him.

4.She enjoys their interviewing her.

Try to Rewrite the sentences on the screen using the correct non-finite passive form.

2. Before doing them, review non-finite verbs together.

(:The verb that cannot be used as the predicate is called the non-finite verb. The “v.-ing, v.-ed or to do cannot act as the predicate, so we call them the non-finite verb.”The passive form of them is separately “being done” “or“to be done”.(Teacher writes them on the blackboard.)

动词--ing形式不定式

形式主动被动主动被动

一般式 writing Being written To write To be written

进行式 To be writing

完成式 Having written Having been written To have wtitten

3. Do the exercise and check the answers..

Suggested answers:

1.It is impossible for lost time to be made up.

2.Rules are made to be broken.

3.I don’t mind his being invited.

4.She enjoys being interviewed

Step3 Do Ex1&2

Step4. Choose the best answers

(B) 1. I learned a lot _________ in the countryside.

A. working B. while working C. when worked D. to work

(A) 2. It is well known that a tiger looks very ____________.

A. frightening B. frightened C. being frightened D. to frighten

(B) 3. The little boy got too _________ to move.

A. frightening S. frightened C. frighten D. to be frightened

A. stick B. sticking C. stuck D. to be stuck

A. deeding B. need C. needed D. to need

(B) 6. The glass of water is too hot. I prefer some cold ________ water.

A. boiling B. boiled C. having boiled D. to boil

(A) 7. It’s a good idea _______ to the front of the line.

A. to push B. of pushing C. pushed D. to be pushed

(B) 8. I won’t have you ________up and down all day.

A. ran B. running C. run d. to run

Home work: Search the internet to get some information about the south

Period 6 Integrating Skill

Goal: . 1. Learn about the American plain and the bison

2. Write a short passage about your home town

3. Lear and master the following:

live by doing in huge numbers make a agreements with die out

wide spread be forced to do cut off as a result

Step 1 Lead-in

Show the picture on the screen. And ask Do you know what the animal is called?

(Its name is bison. It is a type of cattle which used to exist in huge numbers on the plains of America)

.Would you like to know more about the bison?

Step 2 Fast-reading

Answer the two questions

1.In what ways did the settlers treat the Native Americans unfairly?

2.What caused a big change in the wildlife on the plains?

Step 3 Careful reading

Tick the sentences that are true and correct the false ones.

1.( )The first settlers on the plains were farmers.

2.( )Native Americans willingly gave up land to the settlers.

3.( )The settlers did not deal honestly with the native Americans.

4.( )Settlers ended up with better land than the native Americans.

5.( )Later settlers made use of the bison in the same way as the native Americans.

Step 4 Post reading

Use what your have learned from the text to complete the diagram below

Step 5 Writing

Imagine that your American pen friend has sent you an e-mail asking for help.

He want to know the history and the development of your home town. Write a letter to him or her comparing the past and today of your home town. The following table may help you.

The past today

Area and population

City building

Transportation

Education and school

The people’s living conditions

Homework: Finish the writing work.

篇13：Unit 11 全单元教案(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

I．单元教学目标

技能目标Goals

▲ Talk about science and scientific achievement

▲ Practise expressing intentions and wishes

▲ Learn about Word Formation (1)

▲ Write a persuasion essay

II．目标语言

功

能

句

式 1．Talk about science and scientists

2. Practise expressing intentions and wishes

If I got the money, I would……

My plan is to…….

I hope that…….

I want/ wish/hope/intend/plan to……

I’d like to……

I’m thinking of……

词汇 1. 四会词汇

Engineering, solar, significant, mankind, constitution, likely, zone, private, grasp, master, perfect , arrange, rely, failure, locate, valley, brand, luggage, achieve, organ, boom, breakthrough, agency, announce, evolution, supercomputer

2. 认读词汇

Neil Armstrong, Alexander G Bell, eureka, economic, hi-tech, technological, overseas, IT, Lenovo, Founder, silicon, Nokia, Motorola, rejuvenate, impressive, genome, element, byte, humanoid

3. 词组

set foot (in), rely on, put forward,

4．重点词汇

significant, likely, private, grasp, master, perfect , arrange, rely, failure, locate, achieve,

breakthrough, announce

结构 Word formation

重

点

句

子 1．Whatever great achievements the future may have in store for China, it is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing.

2. Not all the new companies can succeed, but the spirit and creativity they represent are more important than money.

The First Period Warming up &Listening& Speaking

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the following.

(1)New words: engineering, solar, significant, mankind, constitution

(2)Everyday English:

If I got the money, I would…

My plan is to…

I hope that…

I want/wish/hope/intend/plan to…

I’d like to…

I’m thinking of…

2.Train the students’ listening and speaking abilities.

3.Talk about science and scientific achievement, urging the students to further understand the significance of science and scientific achievement and encouraging them to work hard at their lessons.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Finish the task of listening to train the students’ listening ability.

2.Practise expressing intentions and wishes to train the students’ speaking ability.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to help the students talk in English about science and scientific achievement freely.

2.How to help the students finish the tasks of listening and speaking smoothly.

Teaching Methods:

1.Listening and speaking to train the students’ ability to use English.

2.Individual,pair or group work to make every student take an active part in class.

Teaching Aids: a tape recorder, a projector and a computer

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Warming up

Show the pictures of some great scientific achievements that have changed the world on the PowerPoint. Divide students into groups and ask them to discuss which one is the most important and what these achievements have in common. (The exercises in warming up on Page 1).Students may have different opinions. The most important thing is to encourage them to think and express their opinions.

T: Please look at these great achievements and work in groups and discuss the following questions. You may have different answers. But you will have to tell us your reasons. (Show the following questions on the PowerPoint.)

1. Among the great scientific achievements that have changed the world, which one do you think is the most important? Why?

2. What are some other scientific achievements that you think are important?

3. Do these achievements have anything in common? If so, what?

Five minutes later ask some students to speak out their opinion.

T: Ok. Please stop here. I’d like to listen to your opinions.

S1: I think electricity is the most important. The modern world cannot work without electricity. Electricity has changed our way of life. This summer in some areas there wasn’t enough electric power, so some factories had to close and people had lot of problems in life.

S2: In my opinion the most important is Radio and television. Radio and television have changed the way we look at the world.

S3: That’s true. But I still think the most important is solar energy. Because by using solar energy, we can save other energy resources. And what’s more we can protect our environment…

T: Good! Do these achievements have anything in common?

Ss: These great achievements have changed the world.

S8: And all these great achievements were made by westerners/ foreigners.

T: That’s true. My dear students please think thousands of years ago our ancestors made 4 great inventions that changed the world. We are proud of them. But among the recent 75 greatest achievements, none was achieved by us Chinese .So I hope you study hard and make great scientific achievements. I will be very proud of you. Every Chinese will be proud of you.

Step II Listening

T: The listening material contains two parts. You are going to hear some words said by some famous people at the time when they achieved success. Can you follow me?

Ss: Yes.

T: Well, now look at the chart in Exercise 1 at the top of Page 2 quickly. Then I’ll play the first part of the tape for you to complete it. After that, I’ll check your answers.

(After checking the answers to Exercise 1,teacher goes on to deal with Exercise 2)

T: Well done. Now, listen to Part 2 and complete the sentences in Exercise 2.If necessary, I’ll play it twice for you to finish or check your answers. OK?

Ss: OK.

T: I’ll play it. Listen carefully!

(At last, teacher deals with Exercise 3.)

T:OK. So much for the tape. Now imagine you were the first person on Mars, or the first cloned human being or the first person to travel in time, what would you say? Any volunteer?

S1:If I were the first person on Mars, I would say “I’m here from the earth.”…

S2:…

T: Wonderful. If you want to do research about something, besides hard work, what else do you need?

Ss: Modern equipment and money, especially money. You get enough money, and then you get the equipment you need. Funds are essential for doing research.

T: You are right. Now, please look at the Speaking part.

Step III Speaking

T: Here are four scientists who want to get money to complete their project. Each scientist will have to introduce his or her project and explain why it is the most important. Now, I’ll put you in groups of five to have a discussion. Four group members represent scientists; one member will listen to all the scientists and ask questions. At the end of the discussion, he or she must decide who will get the money and why. Is everything clear?

Ss: Yes.

T: And following the situation, there are some useful expressions. You can use them to express your intentions and wishes. Let’s go through them together before your discussion.

(Teacher and the students go through the expressions. After that, teacher puts the students in groups of five and gets them to prepare for a few minutes. At the end, teacher asks one or two groups to report their work to the rest of the class.)

Step IV Summary and Homework

T: In this class, we’ve mainly talked about scientific achievement. Centering on this topic, we did some listening and speaking. This way, we’ve learnt more about science and scientific achievement. Moreover, we’ve learnt some useful expressions to express intentions and wishes, such as “If I got the money I would…;My plan is to…;”(Teacher writes them on the blackboard.)After class, try to practise using them and preview the reading part. So much for today. Goodbye, everyone.

Ss:Goodbye, Mr/Ms…

The Second Period Reading

Teaching Aims:

1. Target Language:

a. 重点词汇和短语

likely zone, private, grasp, master, perfect, arrange, rely, failure, locate, valley, set foot in, rely on

b. 重点句型

①Whatever great achievements the future may have in store for China, it is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing.

②Not all the new companies can succeed, but the spirit and creativity they represent are more important than money.

2.Ability goals: Learn about the development of Zhongguancun and great achievements China has made in recent years. Encourage students to become interested in hi-tech.

3. Learning ability goals: Students are divided into different groups. Each group will be assigned different tasks. They are asked to collect Zhongguancun’s information from different resources outside of class. Each group member should be involved. Through these activities students should learn to be involved, co-operate and solve problems.

Teaching important points

The development of Zhongguancun and great achievements China has made in recent years.

Teaching difficult points

How to analyze the text and grasp the main idea of the text.

Teaching methods Listening, reading, discussing

Teaching aids a tape recorder, a projector and a computer

Teaching procedures:

Step I Revision

Check the homework..

Go over the three great names Neil Armstrong, Alexander G Bell, Ray Tomlinson and how they changed the world.

Ask some students to read words and expressions in Unit 11.

Step II Pre-reading

Deal with the questions in the pre-reading part.

T: Good! In this class we are going to learn about the development of Zhongguancun First I’d like to make a survey. If you wanted to do research or start a hi-tech company, what kind of support and environment would you need?

S1: I think I will need support from academies of science.

S2：I think I will need support from the government, i.e. special policy to support my company.

S3: In my opinion, competition will help companies develop very fast. So I will set up my company in a science and technology center.

S4:……

T: Good! Why are scientific achievements important? How do they improve our life? How do they improve society?

S8: Scientific achievements can improve our life and change the world. For example before areoplanes and cars were invented, it took years to travel around the world. Now it is very convenient for people to travel.

S9: Scientific achievements make our life colorful. Scientific achievements make life more comfortable.

S10: Scientific achievements change our way of life. We are living a life quite different from our ancestors’.

S11: Scientific achievements also change our way of thinking…

T: So scientific achievements are very important. Then you will good answers to this question:

Why do scientists spend so much time trying to achieve something?

S15: Because they like to do something valuable.

S16: Then they turn their wishes into reality.

S17: They are doing something to strengthen the social development.

T: They are very great. I hope you study hard and in future you will make some scientific achievements to benefit the world.

Step III Leading in

Help students to learn something about the symbol of Zhongguancun..

T: Now look at the picture. ( Show the picture of the statue in Zhongguancun on the PowerPoint.) Do you know where it is? It is a statue of a DNA molecule. It is the symbol of the Zhongguancun Scientific and Technological Garden. In this class we are going to learn something about Zhongguancun.

Step IV Reading

Deal with the reading part.

Scanning

Ask the students to scan the text and find the information aboutZhongguancun. Then fill the information in the form. It is not necessary to write in whole sentences. Key words will do. Students will finish the task independently and then they will compare their notes with their group members.

T: First I’d like you to do the scanning and then finish the form with the information you get from the text. You don’t need to write in sentences. Key words are OK. After you finish, please compare your notes with the other group members.

Show the form on the PowerPoint.

Zhongguancun is located in Northwestern Beijing

What is it? China’s Silicon Valley

In the early 1980s Chen Chunxian opened a private research and development institute

Set up as a special economic zone

Zhongguancun is home to A growing number of overseas Chinese;

A number of science parks;

Many IT companies

The number of IT companies in Zhongguancun More that 8,000 hi-tech companies

Its effect On business& science

Several minutes later, students compare their information with each other in groups. Then show the following form on the PowerPoint.

Zhongguancun is located in Beijing’s Haidian District Northwestern Beijing

What is it? New center for Chinese science and technology China’s Silicon Valley

The science center got started In the early 1980s Chen Chunxian opened a private research and development institute

Set up as a special economic zone In the late 1990s Leader of China’s hi-tech industry

Zhongguancun is home to Some famous research institutes and universities A growing number of overseas Chinese；A number of science parks;

Many IT companies

The number of IT companies in Zhongguancun More than 4,000 IT companies More that 8,000 hi-tech companies

Its effect positive On business & science

T: From this form we can have a clear image of Zhongguancun. Let’s come to the post reading questions.

Skimming

Ask students to skim the text and then finish the post-reading questions.

T: Look at the post reading questions first. Then skim the text to find the answers.

Then check the answers with the whole class.

Suggested answers: 1. A.B.C.D 2. D 3.C.D 4.B 5. C.D

Sum up the main idea of each part.

Ask the students to read through the text and grasp the main idea of the text. Before giving students the answers, ask them to discuss first.

In this procedure, students should sum up the main ideas by themselves first, then discuss with group members.

(Cooperative learning)

T: Now let’s sum up the main idea of each part. While reading, please think carefully and decide how many parts the text should be divided into.

After reading the text, Ss will think carefully and then they will discuss with their group members. Then some spokesmen will stand up and speak out their opinions.

T: OK. I’m glad you have thought actively and had a heated discussion. Let’s look at the suggested answers.

(Show the suggested answers on the PowerPoint.)

The main idea of each part

Part1 (Paragraph1-2)

General introduction of Zhongguancun.

Part2 (Paragraph 3-7)

Why Zhongguancun attracts more and more overseas Chinese.

Part3 (Paragraph 8-9)

The positive effect Zhongguancun has had on both business and science & the spirit of Zhongguancun.

T:I hope you will remember the spirit of Zhongguancun.I hope it will encourage you to study hard and be the guide of your life.

Step IV Explanation

During this procedure Teacher will play the tape for students. Students will underline the difficult sentences. After listening to the tape, Teacher will explain the text and deal with language problems.

T: We have learned the main ideas of the text. This time we will deal with some difficult language focuses. Now I will play the tape for you .Please make a mark where you have difficulties.

After listening to the tape, explain the difficult sentences to students. Before explaining the difficult points, students are asked to refer to the notes to the text.

T: Do you have any difficulties with the text？

S1In the first sentence Whatever great achievements the future may have in store for China, it is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing. can I replace “likely” with “possible”?

T: Yes, you can. It is the same. We can say “It is possible that something will happen” But when we say “Somebody is likely to do sth “or “Something is likely to happen.”.

E.g. The train is likely to be late.

She is not likely to come next month.

S2: In the last paragraph the second sentence” Not all the new companies can succeed”, does “not all “mean “none”?

T: No, “not all” means” some”.Do you have any other questions?

Ss: No.

T: Today’s home work Surf on the internet and find more about Chen Chunxian and Zhongguancun .That’s all for today.

Step VI Homework

Surf on the internet and find more about Chen Chunxian and Zhongguancun.

The Third Period Grammar

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn the Grammar--- Word formation (I)

2. Study the ways of forming a word and enlarge students’ vocabulary.

3. Enable students to use context clues and what they know about word parts to guess the meaning of new words.

Teaching important points:

The ways of forming a word.

Teaching difficult points:

How to guess the meaning of a new word.

Teaching methods: Explaining and practising

Teaching aids: 1. a projector 2. a computer

Teaching procedures:

Step I Lead in

T: Good morning afternoon, class!

Ss: Good morning afternoon,Mr/Ms…

T: This week we are learning Unit 11 Scientific achievements .Now pay attention to the two words. Will you please tell me how the two words are formed?

S1“Scientific”is the adjective form of” Science”.

S2:“Achievement “ is the noun form of “achieve”.

T: Observe them carefully; can you explain how they are formed?

S3:” Science” is a noun, if we add –fic to it, then we get its adjective.

S4: “achieve” is a verb. If we add –ment to it, we get its noun.

T: Excellent ! That is how the two words are formed. The basic part of any word is the root; to it, you can add a prefix at the beginning and/or a suffix at the end to change the meaning. For example, in the word “unflattering,” the root is simply “flatter,” while the prefix “un-” makes the word negative, and the suffix “-ing” changes it from a verb into an adjective (specifically, a participle).This is the grammar we are going to learn in this class.(Show Word Formation on the powerpoint.)

Step II Grammar

Ask students to observe the given words carefully and find out how words are formed.

T: How do learners improve their vocabulary? There are no super shortcuts to vocabulary, but there are various forms of support. Here is one example. Increasing your vocabulary is so important that you just can't forget about it. Don't bury your head in the sand. OK.. Please look at the following words and tell how they are formed. (Show the following words on the PowerPoint.)

affix

infix

prefix

suffix

Teacher explains the following.

T: What do these words (nouns) have in common?

Ss: All of them contain the root “fix”.

T: Well, they do have a number of things in common. Let's settle for the most obvious, the 'fix' at the end. So if we split them, this is what we get

af + fix

in + fix

pre + fix

suf + fix (These will be shown on the PowerPoint)

T: What does 'fix' mean?

Ss: Fix means attach to, fasten, stick, glue.

T: What about 'af' , 'in' , 'pre' , 'suf' ? in' and 'pre' are understandable, aren't they ?

'in' a room, 'in' a sentence, 'in' a word.

'pre' means before like in pre-war, pre-school, premature.

So what do infix and prefix actually mean? infix - to attach something inside (a word).prefix - to attach something at the beginning of (a word)

What about 'af' and 'suf'?

That's a bit more difficult to explain. 'af' is actually from the beginning the Latin word 'ad', and the meaning is the same as the English word add. Add 4 and 5 and you get 9.

'suf' is the Latin word 'sub', like in submarine, subway, suburb. The meaning is under, after (outside).

Why have the d in 'ad' and the b in 'sub' changed into f?

The reason is really quite simple. 'adfix' and 'subfix' are difficult to pronounce. There is economy in everything! You simply leave out the d and the b, but in order to mark their existence the words are spelt with an extra f .

So what do affix and suffix actually mean?

Ss: affix - to attach something to (a word)

suffix -to attach something at the end of (a word)

T: We have now fixed the fixes, haven't we? affix - something you add (stick) to a word

There are three kinds of affixes:

added inside the word - infix

added at the beginning of the word - prefix

added at the end of the word – suffix

Ss: What's this good for then?

T: Well, there are thousands of words with prefixes and suffixes. The infixes are fewer and less useful to you.

The English vocabulary basically consists of words of Latin and Germanic origin. There are prefixes in both groups.

If you know the basic meaning of a prefix or a suffix you can often 'guess' the meaning of an English word. There are a limited number of Latin prefixes and suffixes. If you learn the meaning of them, and learn to recognize them in English words, you will increase your vocabulary much faster.

Here are some of the most common Latin prefixes (for the meanings of the Latin roots, look up the words in a good dictionary): (Show the following on the PowerPoint.)

(away) abstain, absent, absolve

(to) adverb, advertisement, advance, adjoin

in /il-/im-/ir-

(not) incapable, indecisive, intolerable , illegal, impossible, irrugular

inter

(between, among) international, interaction interdependent, interprovincial

pre

(before) prerecorded, preface prefer

post

(after) postpone, postscript, postwar

sub

(under, not quite) subsoil, subscription, suspect ,subway, subnormal

trans

(across, to a changed state) transfer, transit, translate, transport ,transform

Step III Practice

T: Are you ready for some exercises? Open your books and look at Page6. Let’s do the exercises. Let’s do Exercise 1 first .How are these words formed? (Or show the following words on the PowerPoint).

international= inter-+national telephone= tele-+phone

mankind=man+kind broadband= broad+band

extremely=extreme+-ly manned= man+ -ed

hi-tech= high+technology email= electronic mail

IT= information technology CSA= Chinese Space Agency

S1:I think international and telephone are formed in the same way. We add prefix inter- to national and tele- to phone.

T: Good! What about the others?

S2: Mankind and broadband are formed in the same way. Each is made up of two words.

S3:Extremely and manned are formed by adding a suffix.

S4:Hi-tech is the shortened form of high technology and e-mail is the shortened form of electronic mail.

S5: IT stands for information technology. We use the first letters of the two words to form a new one .We use the first letters of Chinese Space Agency to form the word CSA.

T；Well done .So we know that words are formed in these ways. When you come across a new word, you can easily guess the meaning. Ok ,let’s come to Exercise2.

Deal with the rest of exercises in the same way.

Step IV Exercises( workbook)

T: After doing theses exercises I’m sure you have a better understanding on word formation. I hope this will help you to improve your vocabulary. When you come across a new word, try to guess its meaning in this way. Good luck to you! Today’s homework Finish all of the Vocabulary and Grammar exercises on the workbook That’s all for today.

Step VI Homework: Finish all of the Vocabulary and Grammar exercises on the workbook. Learn vocabulary on scientific achievements.

The Fourth Period Integrating Skills

Teaching Aims:

1. Target language

a. 重点词汇和短语 boom, rejuvenating, impressive, genetic, genome, byte, broadband, humanoid, put forward

b. 重点句型In 1995, the Chinese government put forward a plan for “rejuvenating the nation by relying on science and education”.

2. Help students to learn about scientific achievements in different fields made by Chinese.

3. After learning about scientific achievements, students should realize scientific achievements rely on science and education and knowledge will help them to achieve their goals.

Teaching important points

Help students to learn about scientific achievements in different fields made by Chinese.

Help students to realize scientific achievements rely on science and education and knowledge will

help them to achieve their goals.

Writing: Write a persuasion essay.

Teaching difficult points

How to write a persuasion essay.

Teaching methods: Task-based teaching method

Teaching aids: 1. A recorder 2. A projector 3. A computer

Teaching procedures:

Step I Leading in

T: Though the scientists had many failures, his spirit inspires thousands of people to work hard to build a new future. Just as a motto says: “Encouraging pioneering work and accepting failure”, great scientific achievements are the results of years of failures, years of trying to create something that has never existed before. Now let’s look at the great achievements we Chinese have made in different fields.

Step II Integrating skills

Students are requested to look through the text in the given time and then finish the exercise on Page 8. Students are given several minutes to discuss their answers with their group members. Several minutes later, check the answers with the whole class.

T: Look through the text on page 7 quickly and then finish the exercise on page 8.Eight minutes later we will check the answers together.

Field Achievements Importance

Exploring space Developed Long March rocket series Safe; used to send satellites into space; prepare for the nation’s first manned flight

Genetic research A new kind of rice which allow farmers to increase production；

Completed part of the international human genome project in A leader in the field of genetic research;

Proving that Chinese scientists are among the world’s best

Computer engineering A new high-speed broadband network was recently started;

Developed the supercomputer Shenwei; built the nation’s first humanoid robot The internet is becoming increasingly popular.

Medical science Created a chemical element that can fight cancer cells Gives hope to cancer patients all over the world; makes China one of the world leaders in the battle against the deadly disease.

After finishing the exercises, play the tape for students to follow. Then explain the questions students ask.

Step III Writing

T: Now let’s come to Writing. First read the tips. Then finish writing an essay for the magazine Modern Science.(After the brief introduction, students will discuss in groups. Then they will write an outline by themselves. Students will finish the writing outside class. After every student finishes his writing, their work will be collected and on display.)

Step Ⅳ Homework Finish writing your essay.

篇14：unit 16 Scientists at work全单元(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)

导入

模块一：问题导入（适用于warming up及Listening 部分的导入）

教师联系学生学习实际，引起学生对所学课程的关注，导入本课的主要话题--experiments in the lab。

1) Now you’ve been learning several subjects at school, such as maths, Chinese, English, physics, chemistry and so on. Which do you like best? Why?

2) Do you like doing experiments in physics, chemistry and biology in the labs?

3) Do you often do the experiments by yourselves or directed by your teachers? What has your teacher tell you to pay attention to when you enter the lab? What should you not do?

导入

模块二：图片导入（适用于Speaking部分的导入）

教师展示两张有关磁悬浮列车的图片，问学生是否了解相关背景知识，引导学生结合自己原有的知识，探讨科学新发明的优点与弊端。

Science is a sword with two edges. When new inventions appeared, they brought benefits to human beings as well as trouble. Have you heard about the high-speed Maglev train from Shanghai to Pudong Airport? Let me show you something about it.

教学过程

导入

模块三：

教学过程

重、难点指导

Language points

1．Why should students be careful smelling from bottle? 为什么学生在闻从瓶子里冒出来的气味时要小心？

be careful of 注意...，当心...

be careful about对于...谨慎

be careful with 做...认真，注意...

be careful not to do sth．当心不要...

be careful as to + 从句对于...谨慎

be careful in (doing) sth．在...方面谨慎

be careful + 从句注意...，当心...

be careful doing sth．做某事时要当心

It is careless of sb. to do sth＝Sb．is careless to do sth某人做...太粗心了。

例如：

Be careful of the dog; it sometimes bites people.

当心那只狗，它有时会咬人。

The public was warned to be careful of birds flu.

公众得到警告，要提防禽流感。

People should be more careful about the things they say．

大家对自己说的话应该很谨慎

Please be very careful with those plates!

那些盘子，要十分小心。

He is careful with money.

他用钱很仔细。

He was careful enough to check up every detail.

他非常仔细,把每一个细节都核对过了。

Be careful not to fall off the ladder.

当心别从梯子上掉下来。

Be careful as to who came here early every day.

请留意每天谁来得早。

You must be careful crossing the road.

你过马路一定要当心。

Be careful that you don't fall off the ladder.

当心别从梯子上掉下来。

Be careful that the medicine is kept away from children．

要小心把药放在安全的地方，不要让小孩拿到。

You must be careful who you accept a lift from．

搭乘谁的车，要小心。

Be careful what you say.

你说话要当心。

Be careful how you start the personal computer.

要注意怎样起动个人计算机。

Be careful when you're crossing the road.

过马路时要当心。

It is careless of him to leave the changes of money everywhere.

他很粗心，零钱到处丢。

2. What is it to be done when something gets into your eyes?如果你眼睛里进了东西，该怎么办?

“be + to do”结构表示安排、命令、职责, 义务、目的、用途、可能性、命中注定等。

例如：

We are to meet at the school gate．

我们约定在校门口碰头. (安排)

You are to be back by l0 o’clock．

你得在10点种前回来(命令)

A knife is to cut with．

刀是用来切割的。(用途)

They were never to meet again．

他们注定以后永远不再见面.(命中注定)

I am to inform you that the meeting will be held in Hang zhou.

我谨通知你会议在杭州举行。(职责)

3. Work in pairs and discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the following scientific discoveries and applications.

be of great /no advantage to

take advantage of 利用...

to one's advantage 对某人有利

have/gain/win an advantage over…比...有优势

have the advantage of … 有对...的优势，知道某人所不知道的事

例如：

It is an advantage if you know how to type.

如果你会打字，将会对你有利。

This kind of training is of great advantage to teenagers.

这种训练对青少年有好处。

We took advantage of the fine weather to go on a hike.

我们利用晴朗的天气去旅游。

I hope that this library is fully taken advantage of.

我希望图书馆能得到充分利用。

= I hope that full advantage is taken of this library.

She has got the job because she has the advantage (over others) of knowing many languages.

她能得到这份工作是因为她（比别人）多懂几门语言。

It’ll be to your advantage to study abroad.

到国外学习对你有好处。

4．We should make more use of this new technology.

make use of 利用

make good／better／the best use of 很好地／较好地／充分地利用

make full use of 充分利用

make the best of 善用，充分利用

come into use 开始被使用

go／fall out of use不再被使用

of use＝useful有用的

put．to use使用，利用

It's no use／good doing sth．做某事没有用／好处。

5. It brings people more comfort.

n. 安慰；舒适；使人得到安慰的人／事物

vt．安慰；使舒适

comfortable adj 安慰的，舒适的

take／seek comfort from (in) doing．．．在…中得到(寻求)安慰

live in comfort 过得舒适

例如：

His kindness gave her much/great comfort.

他的好心给了她极大的安慰。

Words of comfort can be important to those who are in trouble.

宽心的话对身处困难之中的人是非常重要的。

A hot cup of tea on a cold night is a real comfort.

寒冷冬季的夜晚来杯热茶真是一种享受。

My husband is always a comfort to me when I meet difficulties.

在遇到困难的时候，我丈夫对我是个安慰。

6．Can you name some of them?

be named．．．名叫...

name．．．after...以...名字为...命名

name Sb．(as)．．．任命某人为…

name no names 不指出名字

name a date 指定一个日子

call sb．by name 叫某人的名字

by the name of 名叫...的

call sb．names 谩骂某人

make／get a name 成名

in the name of以...的名义

7. Can you describe a science experiment that you did?

n. make／do／carry out / perform an experiment in … ( chemistry..)做／进行实验

Some people learn by experiments and others by experience.

v. experiment with… 用…做实验

experiment on… 拿…做实验；在…(身)上做实验

experimenter实验者；试验者experimental adj．实验／试验性的

例如：

Don’t experiment with such dangerous drugs.

不要用这种危险的药物做实验。

They decided to experiment on animals first．

他们决定先拿动物做实验。

8. Having realised that I could use a kite to attract lightning，I decided to do an experiment．意识到我能用风筝采吸引闪电，我决定做一个实验。

having realised是现在分词的完成式，分词短语在句中作状语，表示该动作(realise)发生在主句谓语动词所表示的动作之前，相当于When I had realised that..

又如：

Having finished his homework，she went on the internet．

做完作业后，她就上了网。

现在分词短语的否定形式应将not放在v-ing之前，其完成式的否定式为not having done。

__________ a reply, he decided to write again. (MET 1992)

A. Not receiving B. Receiving not

C. Not having received D. Having not received

答案： C

9. The string was getting charged！风筝线带电了！

charge sb. money (for...) 因…收某人…钱

free of charge免费的

charge a cellphone/ battery/ machine给手机/电池/机器充电

sb be in/ under charge ( of sth ) 负责(某事)

sth be in/ under the charge of sb由...掌管

take charge of负责，管理

leave．．．in charge of sb．把...交给某人管

put sb．in charge of．．．让某人负责…

soldier /wild animal/ footballer charge towards …= rush towards… 士兵/野兽/球员冲向…

get burnt/ lost/ hurt/ drunk/ killed/ married/ excited 此类短语表动作

例如：

He charged me $100 for this bike.

My cell phone needs charging.

The girl was safe in the charge of a nurse.

Don't leave everything in charge of the young man.

Can you take charge of this class, Miss Smith?

I'll put you in charge of him.

10. The experiment proves that lightning and electricity are the same.

prove sth to sb 向某人证明某事

prove that… 证明…

prove sb (to be ) +n. / adj. 证明...是…

prove (to be )+ adj 证明是…

例如：

Can you prove your theory to us?

Can you prove that your theory is reasonable. 你能证明你的理论合理吗？

This experiment proved his theory ( to be ) reasonable./ a reasonable one.

His theory proves (to be) reasonable.

11．Most kites are made of paper, but a kite made of silk will not tear so soon in with rain and strong winds.

tear sth to pieces/in half/ open白条把某物撕成碎片/两半/开

tear sth down ( from…) 把..拆掉

tear sth off…把某物扯掉

例如：

She tore her skirt on a nail. 她的裙子在钉子上刮破了。

The paper tears easily. 这种纸容易扯烂。

类似主动表被动的动词还有write, read, sell, lock, fill, strike, wear, translate, cut, dry, move

12．Fly the kite when a thunderstorm appears to be coming on. 在雷雨要来的时候，就可以放风筝了。

There seems / appears to be… 似乎有…

It seems/appears ( to sb) that/as if… 在某人看来好象…

Sb appears to do /be doing/ have done 某人似乎要做／正在做／已经做…

Sb appears to be +n. /adj 某人似乎是…

例如：

It appears that he will win the prize.

It appears to me that he is right and you are wrong.

He appears to have done that.

It appears to be raining.

13．There is no doubt that 100 years ago animal testing was cruel but today animals in experiments are very well taken care of. 毫无疑问，一个世纪以前动物实验非常残酷，而今实验中的动物得到了悉心照顾。

There is no doubt of sth 某事是毫无疑问的

There is some doubt as to/ about 对于某事，仍有疑问。

without doubt 勿庸质疑

doubt sth 怀疑某事

doubt whether/if….

don’t doubt that…

例如：

There is no doubt of his success.

There is some doubt about whether/if he will succeed.

I have some doubt about his success= I doubt his success= I doubt whether/ he will succeed.

I have no doubt that he will succeed.= I don’ t doubt that he will succeed

He will succeed without doubt.

教学过程

课堂活动设计

模块三：举行辩论会

活动时间

学完本单元后

语言知识要求

1)本单元有关的语言

2)辩论常见句型及格式：

Topic

For side：We should test medicines on animals

Against side： We should not test medicines on animals

Debaters

For side：

Against side：

STATEMENTS

Sentences for reference;

Good afternoon，ladies and gentlemen，our point of view is that…

So as I mentioned about …, it is very very important in the role of animals．

First I want to explain our opinion about this．We think

FREE DEBATE

Well，thank you，Chairman，and to our opponents．You have mentioned the importance for …

Don't you think so？Thank you．

I should like to correct one thing，the against friend said，“…”It doesn't mean …

SUMMARY

Good afternoon，just now，we talked a lot about…． First，we all agree ….Well，and second，let's take a look at …

Thank you，Chairman，here I should declare that our point of view is that …and so I would like to say again our point of view is that …．Thank you．

语言技能要求

听，说，读，写

活动形式

1）小组活动：按观点取向确定正方，反方。各方分配任务，各自收集资料，交流、整理、排练，确定主辩手、第一、二、三副辩手。邀请英语教师及部分同学做评委。由一名同学担当主席。

2）班级活动：班级辩论会

任务目的

1）培养学生辩证思维，学会全面分析问题

2）引导学生在实际应用中巩固所学的知识。

板书设计

模块三：诱导式

Reading

Title Experimenter’s name

Purpose:

Procedure:

Things needed: _______ ________ ________ _________

Three steps : _____________________________

______________________________

Things which should be taken care:

_______________________________

Results:

Conclusion:

评价性练习

I Complete the following sentence:

1．They were _____________(做实验)when I entered the lab．

2．I think the medicine _________(不起作用)．

3．He appeared___________(在睡觉)．

4．The cell phone has______________(充电)．

5．He spent________(大量)money in buying books．

6．The rain___________ (阻止)me going out．

7．Scientists________ (检验)new medicines on animals．

8．___________(毫无疑问)that he knows it

9．She was___________ (哭)in the street．

10．__________ (知道)his mother was i11，he went home．

II Multiple choices

1. The hotel _______ 240 yuan for a double room for the night.

A. offered B. charged C. paid D. gave

2. ---This kind of cloth _______ well and ____ long.

---OK. I’ll take it.

A. washes, lasts B. is washed, lasted

C. washes, is lasted D. is washing, lasting

3. Don’t worry! We are sure to win the match, for we have two good basketball players, which is of great ________ to us.

A. value B. use C. importance D. advantage

4. I tore the letter ________my daughter and tore________.

A. at , it open B. at, open it

C. from, it up D. down , it up

5. There is no doubt _______ Don has brains. In fact, I doubt _______ anyone in the class has higher IQ.

A. whether, that B. that, whether

C. /, / D. /, whether

6. ________such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean up the river. (NMET )

A. Having suffered B. Suffering

C. To suffer D. Suffered

7. In the third century of Rome, there was an emperor _______ the name of Claudius II, who decided that marriage was not allowed in military.

A. in B. by c. with D. on

8. --Who is _________ this case?

--Sorry, I don’t know. But a lot of policemen went out __________ that lost child.

A. looking into, discovering

B. catching, and looked for

C. in charge of, in search of

D. in the charge of, to find

9. –How much should I pay for the meat?

-- _____________.

A. Just little money B. Of course, I’ll pay it

C. You can count it D. It’s free of charge

10. --Don’t get the fire _________.

--Why not! I don’t think the room warm yet.

A. out B. going C. burnt D. turning on

Suggested answers:

1. doing an experiment

2. doesn’t work

3. to be sleeping

4. been charged

5. a great deal of

6. stopped

7. test

8. There is no doubt

9. in tears

10. Having known

II.

1.B 2. A 3.D 4. D 5.B 6. A 7. B 8. C 9. D 10

In 1952, a stormy night, Franklin set out a kite and that was the most famous kite experiment in the world. Franklin didn't invent electricity through that experiment. However, it proved that man-made electricity generated by friction and electricity from lightning have a similar discharge. Franklin used cedar sticks to form a cross and made it as the frame of a kite, then paste a silk handkerchief on the cross as the sail of the kite. On the top of the cross, he attached a 30 cm long copper line, and he sharpened the top of the line. On the other end of the line, he fastened a silk ribbon with a brass key fastened on it. Not wanting to wet the silk ribbon, he stood on dry ground inside a shed, and flew the kite. And at the same time, he couldn't let the flying line hit the doorframe or window frame, either. When the dark clouds which brought thunders and lightings covered the kite, the sharp end of the copper line would pass the electricity down, and so the kite and flying line were electrified. At that time, when anyone reached out one finger to the brass key, that person could easily feel the electricity. This experiment was rough and daring, for those scientists who re-do this experiment later on, they would have to use “electric proof” material, such as a spool made of glass, to avoid danger.

Kites can be used for fishing. There is a special species of fish in south Pacific Ocean. It tastes fresh and delicious, but the tasty needlefish has a shy nature. It likes to find food near the the surface of tropical oceans. Therefore, the islanders invented an unique way of fishing. They use kites made from leaves and set the kites offshore. They fastened the fishing lines on the kites, and tied a hook or made a noose by the end of the fishing line, and loaded shrimps as the bait.

Draw by Jun Hen Text by Chen, Wu Zhen Title: Fly a Kite

Fishing with kites became a type of entertainment gradually. Some people will attach two lines to control the kite, so that they can put the bait where ever they like.

The biggest waterfall in the world is Niagara Falls. When the first bridge was build over the falls, engineers couldn't deliver the giant cable to the other side of the falls. (at that time, helicopter hadn't been used in that field yet) All of the people were at their wit's end, and at that time, a man came forwards and suggested that they could use kites to deliver. And they succeeded.

Wilson was a meteorologist. Once he stringed 5 kites together and flew them up to about 900-meter-high. He tied thermographs in each kite to measure the change of temperature in different height. This method of researching meteorology was very popular in late 19 Cent ray. Some people even tied a camera and other equipments on kites to collect various data of the atmospheric layer.

In World War II, kites did save many airmen's lives. At that time, when pilots were in danger and had to parachute, they often had to land in sea or mountain areas. At that time, they needed to take out the kite kept in the back bag, and let the kite keep flying in the sky.

Although they had landed, but they could take advantage of the telegraph transmitter they brought with them, and sent out signals to ask for help. Their signals would be sent farer through kites, subsequently, the rescuer would be able to get there on time. In world war II, British and America troops used kites as target of shooting, and distributing fly sheets. In 1895, Eddy tied some photographic equipments on kites, and took the first bird's eye view pictures.

The above information adopted from “ Flying Kite”, published by Taiwan Department

Unit 16 Scientists at work

________________________________________

一. 教学背景分析

1．学生情况分析

本单元的设计与实施是建立在学生经过高一上半学期新教材学习基础之上。学生已经逐步的适应了在活动与任务中学习英语以及如何处理语言知识与活动开展的关系。并且，他们也已经形成并培养了一定的小组合作学习及自主学习的能力。

2. 单元背景分析

随着科学技术的发展，各种各样新的发明和发现都层出不穷。生活在这样一个知识爆炸的年代，学生们更应用心去体会并感受科技和发明创造者给生活带来的变化，进而能联想到他们平时所学的学科及知识，并用英语为媒介进行知识的整合与串联。同时从另一个角度来说，科技进步的同时，我们的社会也产生了各种各样的矛盾与争论，因此如何正确的看待或处理这些问题，也成为广大学生应该了解并掌握的知识。

二．教学目标分析

1．语言知识

词汇：学习并使用一些与science 和scientists有关的词汇。

语法：进一步了解一词多义现象与合成词的构成。

功能：学习如何就某一事物给予别人指导与说明。

话题：掌握有关实验说明的话题表达以及如何从正反两方面对某一话题进行分析讨论。

2．语言技能

听：在听懂教师向学生讲述实验中注意事项基础上，继续学习并强化捕捉特定信息的能力，以及确定全文主要话题的概括能力。

说：应能在了解一定的现代科技发明基础上，思考并学习如何对一种新的事物进行描述。同时能与他人进行交流，叙述事物的利与弊端。

读：强化略读、查读等阅读微技能，训练通过寻找关键词，主题句等方式更快速并准确的确定文章的段落大意，理清文章的总体框架与脉络。继续运用已经掌握的基本猜词技巧猜测部分单词，并在上下文体验中感受某些佳句给读者带来的深层含义。

写：学习在对事物进行理性思考的基础上，运用恰当的句型与词汇描述对事物正反面的不同观点，同时更应注重掌握一些必要的过渡词增加此类写作的条理性与层次感，并应熟悉议论性作文的基本写作框架。

3．情感态度与文化意识

（1).进一步培养小组合作学习的能力，通过调查、采访、讨论等活动完成任务，取长补短，加强团体协作意识。

（2).引导学生用英语进行不同学科特点的思考，体会学科之间的联系与区别。通过话题启发学生积极思考，调动学生的学习兴趣。

（3).指导学生用批判的思维去接受新的事物，增强他们的辩论意识与能力。

（4).意识到科技工作的艰苦以及所必需的个人品质与素质，鼓励学生在学习过程中的创新精神与实践能力。

4．学习策略

指导学生运用已学会的抓重点、做记号、摘笔记等方式对所学内容进行整理与归纳，并鼓励学生增加与教师和同学交流、合作，继续培养正确的自我评价与相互评价的习惯，从而总结交流学习所得，进一步形成有效的学习方法。并指导学生把英语学习从课堂延伸到课外，发挥已掌握的使用工具书，查找资料、上网等方式增加用英语思维与表达的能力，了解实验对于科学研究的重要性，树立正确的向上的学习态度，形成具有批判性的看问题习惯。

三. 教学内容分析

本单元的中心话题是science and scientists。话题依附于听力、对话、阅读与写作等语言载体中。本单元的话题内容与学生的日常学习有着密切的关系，应该说是以英语为媒体让学生表达他们对平时理化生等理科课程，特别是相关实验，所想到及感受到的内容。因此，尽管本单元的话题对学生而言有着一定的难度，但却有体现出了以学生为中心，贴近学生生活而又富有时代气息的特点。

Warming up设计了四幅与学生的理科课程有关的图片，学生通过对日常熟悉的相干实验工具及场地的识别，展开相关学科特点与学习的讨论。同时在此基础上，要求学生们在Listening部分能熟悉某些实验室的规则及注意事项，掌握如何给予别人指导与说明，并能抓住文章的中心话题，捕捉相关细节内容，回答有关的问题。

Speaking则是一个极富时代气息的讨论练习。要求学生们能对现在热门的尖端科技有所了解，（练习中提供了诸如Maglev train, cloning, nuclear energy, computer 与 space flight等内容）然后能就这些新的科学技术与工具进行理性的辨证的思考，既能感受到它们给我们的生活带来的巨大利益，同时也能发现其中所存在的不足与弊端，并能通过讨论、对话等形式发表自己的观点与想法。这一部分也应该是本单元写作内容的一个铺垫。

Reading讲述的是科学家Franklin著名的风筝实验，从而证明Lighting and electricity are the same的故事。学生在理解文章的基础上，能充分感受到实验对于科学工作的重要性及科学家是如何获得事业上的成功的。同时能落实材料中所出现的一些单词与短语的使用。

Language Study是在本单元词汇学习的基础上，让学生进一步了解并掌握一定的构词法。主要是兼类词、一词多义现象及合成词的构成。

Integrating skills 通过学生对科学家是否应利用动物进行实验，从而达到发明新产品现象的讨论，理性的从正反两个方面看待这一问题。同时在阅读、思考与讨论的基础上，写下一篇阐明自己观点、立场与看法的短文。

四. 教学重点与难点

1. 重点

（1）.掌握如何就某一话题给予别人指示与说明，能熟练运用 Don’t do… / Don’t forget to… / Make sure… / Remember that… / Do be careful of…等结构进行讨论、对话与表演。

（2）.能就某一话题进行合理的分析，并从不同的角度去分析问题，展示一个物体的利与弊两个方面。同时能在讨论时学会运用哪些结构与单词对事物进行评价，诸如“ It’s good / bad / harmful for… / It’s dangerous / expensive / important / unnecessary/ It brings people …/ It can help people…

（3）.能继续运用各种阅读微技能进行有效的阅读，同时能在阅读中继续培养猜测单词词义的能力。同时掌握文中出现的单词与短语的使用。

（4）.能进一步了解一词多义及合成词的知识。以便能更好的区别单词词义与猜测单词词义，利用构词法知识扩充词汇量，并能真正做到为阅读服务。

（5）.能把事物的正反利益和理性的思考落实到笔头，即能清晰地就某一争论性话题发表自己的立场，阐明原因。并能进一步运用基本的协作技能学会argumentative essay的写作。

2．难点

（1）.如何有效的让学生就given topic进行合作，分析问题的利弊，并掌握相关的词汇。

（2）.如何能就课文内容完成一些开放性的话题讨论，能把课文的内容得以延伸与拓展。

（3）.如何更加有效的掌握并运用一些key words and expressions, such as make /do an experiment on…, comfort, conduct,

charge, a great of, prove, tear, sharp, explain, pick out, test on, doubt, conclusion and so on.

（4）.如何能使议论性作文表达的更加完整与流畅。

（5）.指导学生通过各种渠道如图书馆、网络等资源查找资料。

五、教学原则

（1）以任务型教学 (Task-based Language Teaching)作为课堂教学设计之理念，具体采用情景教学法（Situational Approach），交际教学法（Communicative Approach），整体语言教学法（Whole Language Teaching）等教学方法。从一定程度上说，人们使用语言是为了完成各种各样的任务，而任务型的教学活动就是让学习者通过运用所学语言来完成各种各样的交际活动。学习者通过表达、沟通、交涉、解释、询问等各种语言形式来学习和掌握语言，实现目标，感受成功。

（2）在教学中突出交际性，注重读写的实用性；同时适时进行情感与策略调整，以形成积极的学习态度，促进语言实际运用能力的提高。

（3）坚持“教师为主导，学生为主体，任务为基础”的教学原则，在课堂教学的不同环节教师应扮演自身作为“设计者，研究者，组织者，促进者，协调者”的角色。

（4）贯彻“教中学，学中用”策略，真正使学生学以致用。

六. 教材与任务安排

本单元计划为六课时：Warming up & Listening （1课时）， Speaking (1课时) ，Reading (2课时)， Grammar (1课时)， Integrating skills（1课时）。同时本单元安排的三大任务是（1）.为学校理化生实验室拟订英语实验室规则。并以墙报的形式进行比较后，选出其中最佳的规则，然后上报给学校。（2）.科学家创造发明故事比赛。要求学生在课外收集国内外发明家的故事，经过整理后，能以故事、小品、对话等不同形式表演出来。在全班同学的共同评判下选出最佳故事及选手。（3）.当地热点争论问题讨论。搜集本地目前人们所争论的一些问题，并能采集到不同的人对于这一问题的不同看法与见解，并能进行思考后，发表自己的立场与观点。然后写一封书信给当地相应的管理机构或政府部门。

Teaching Plan

Period 1 Warming up & Listening

Learning Aims

1.To encourage the students to think and talk about their science subjects and activate their relevant vocabulary at the same time.

2.To learn what should be paid attention to when doing an experiment in a lab and how to give instructions to others.

3.To train the students’ ability of listening for information.

Learning Procedures

Step 1 Warming up

Today, we are going to talk something about the subjects you are learning.

Q1: How many subjects are you learning now?

Q2: What are the subjects in which you learn science? Is it easy for you to learn them?

1). Group work

Divide the whole class into two groups, one group is going to talk about the question “ What do you learn about for each field of science?”, and the other “How are you learning these subjects?” Write down the result of the discussion in a card, and choose the best member to do the report.

2). Class work

Enjoy some pictures about the facilities in labs and students doing experiments in labs.

Q: Which subjects are connected with these pictures? Do you often do experiments in the lab?

Step2 Pre-listening

1).Group work

Is it necessary for you to do experiments in the lab? List the reasons in the card and see which group can find more.

2).Class work

Do you still remember what your teacher often remind you before, when and after you do an experiment? Divide the whole into several groups to have a competition in class and see which group will win the game.

Step 3 Listening

1). Listen to what Mr. Zhu is talking to his students for the first time, focusing on the subjects mentioned in the passage.

2). Listen to the tape for the second time to write down some key words to the questions and check with the partners.

3). Listen to the tape for the third time. Understand the whole passage fully and check if the answers are complete, especially pay attention to different structures of giving instructions.

DOS DON’TS

Follow / teacher’s /instructions Don’t come into / without …

Be careful about / when… Don’t touch… / unless…

Always listen carefully to… Don’t throw… / unless…

Clean…away and leave …clean and neat Don’t forget to…

You should tie…up Never put / nose directly into…

Remember that… Never put /fingers into/ and taste…

Make sure that…

Step 4 Post-listening

1). Group work

List what you can do and can’t do in a lab as much as possible in groups.

2). Individual work

Knowing the rules in a lab is very necessary for the sake of our safety. Suppose you are a chemistry teacher, and you are going to make an announcement to your students to give them some instructions before an experiment.

3). Group work

Design the rules for the chemistry lab of your school in groups and put it on the wall in the classroom.

Homework:

Task 1. Have a discussion to find out the best rules for the lab and recommend it to the school leader.

Task 2. Preview Speaking and try to search for some information about the new inventions and discoveries.

Period 2 Speaking

Learning Aims

1. To learn to cooperate with partners to analysis a problem in different views.

2. Enable students to describe the advantages and disadvantages of something in specific words.

Learning Procedures

Step 1 Warming-up

Daily report

1). Class work

Watch a video about the successful launch of ShenZhou V manned space flight in China.

Nowadays, more and more new inventions and discoveries are made all over the world.

2). Brainstorming

List the words they’ve learned about the new scientific inventions and discoveries. Then have a short introduction to Maglev train.

Step 2 Pre-speaking

1). Pair work

Read the dialogue aloud to finish the following form:

inventions advantages disadvantages

Maglev train

2). Group work

Discuss how you can talk about the advantages and disadvantages about some new inventions and list the relevant words and phrases an many as possible.

Advantages Disadvantages

It’s good for… It is too expensive

It can help… It is dangerous to…

It is important for… It is unnecessary to..

It brings people… Some people will use it for…

It doesn’t pollute… It is bad / or harmful for…

Step 3 While speaking

1). Group work

Enjoy some pictures about some new inventions. (Cloning, Nuclear energy, Computers and Space flight ) Each group is to choose one of them to have a discussion and list the advantages and disadvantages. Exchange the ideas with the whole class.

2). Pair work

Make a dialogue in pair to talk about one of the inventions, using the structures to show your agreement and disagreement, such as I’m afraid…/ I can’t agree with you./ I don’t think so. / In my opinion… And then act it out.

Step 4 Post-speaking

1). Debate

The scientific technologies are improving very fast. Some of them are widely accepted and applied, while some are still being argued about by people. Cloning humans is still one of them. In your opinion, do you think it good to do so all over the world?

Divide the whole class into two groups to have a debate and see which group will perform better.

2). Imagination

If you were a scientist many years later after you graduated from universities. Do you think what you would try to invent or discover? And why do you think so?

Homework:

Task 1. Read the following poem ,and then try to imitate it and write down a similar one, of course, about other inventions.

Compute

A compute is a machine. A computer is interesting.

A machine is useful. I can study a computer.

I can use it.

Who made it? Humans being made it.

I am a human being. am warm. I am wise.

I have empathies for animals and people.

I conductor a computer. A computer does not conductor me.

Task 2 Find out one interesting story about some famous scientists and retell it in your own words.

Flossie Wong-Staal

An interview with Emilio Alvarez and Ann Crystal Angeles

Flossie Wong-staal stays on the move. She moved with her family from China to Hong Kong when she was five. Later she moved to the United States to attend college. Now Wong-Staal is on the move to clone the virus that is believed to cause AIDS and to figure out how the molecules（分子）of the virus are arranged. Wang-Staal heads a team of scientists at the university of California, San Diego. They are trying to save lives by making an AIDS vaccine(疫苗).

Emilio: How did you decide that you wanted to become scientist?

Wong-Staal: At first my teachers made the decision. In high school they said I should study science because of my grades. By the time I graduated from college, there were so many exciting discoveries being made in molecular biology that I wanted to specialize it.

Emilio: What was your high school like?

Wong-Staal: I went to an all-girl high school in Hong Kong. I felt very free at an all-girl school, and I have fond memories of that time.

Anne Crystal: Would you explain your research?

Wong- Staal: Basically me colleagues and I are trying to understand how the AIDS virus is replicated, and then to develop ways to interrupt the replication process, By “replication” I mean the way in which the virus gets inside a cell and uses that cell as a sort of factory to make many many copies of itself.

Anne Crystal: Do you always enjoy your job in the laboratory?

Wong-Staal: Yes,, I think it’s very exciting work. Of course it’s not every day that you make a discovery and have that kind of reward. But when it does happen, it’s a real thrill. It’s exciting to know that you brought about knowledge that didn’t exist before.

Anne Crystal: What would you tell students who would like to become research scientists?

Wong- Staal: Stay with your interest, and get good information about the education you will need. I also have warning: Things are not always easy. There are frustrations in research; sometimes things don’t go the way you’d hoped. But when you make a discovery or a contribution to science, it becomes worthwhile. And I want to encourage all young people to be interested in science: We need you !

1. As you read, guess the meaning of the boldface words from the surroundings words and sentences.

2. Look back over the reading to find the following information:

(1). Where Wong-Staal was born: (2). What she is studying in her research:

(3). What she was the first person to do:

(4). This article is primarily about______________.

A. the scientist Wong- Staal B. making an AIDS vaccine

C. preventing the spread of disease

(5). Which question is NOT answered in the reading?

A.What college did Wong- Staal attend

B. What type of biology did she specialize in

C.Where does she work now

(6). You can infer that Wong- Staal

A. didn’t want to become a scientist

B. is happy she becomes a research scientist

C. plans to retire soon

3. Write about the following two questions in your journal.

(1). Wong- Staal says that there are frustrations in research. What do you think she means? What frustrations might there be in doing research? How would you deal with these frustrations?

(2). Wong- Staal says that here teachers decided she should become a scientist. Do you think teachers should make career choices for their students? Why or why not?

Period 5 Language study

Learning Aims

Enable students to have a better knowledge of the rules of word-formation.

Learning Procedures

Step 1 Warming up

Daily report: Show your opinions about the two problems mentioned in the reading passage.

Individual work

Show a tongue twister to students:

If one doctor doctors another doctor, does the doctor who doctors the doctor doctor the doctor the way the doctor he is doctoring? Or does he doctor the doctor the way the doctor who doctors doctors?

Practise the tongue twister for some times and see who can say it correctly and fast.

Q: Do all “doctors” in this sentence have the same meaning?

Conclusion: The meaning of the same word varies in different sentences and so does the gender.

Step 2 Reading and thinking

1). Pair work

Read the following sentences to distinguish the different meanings of the same word.

How much do you charge for repairing my CD player?

The frightened animal charged into the toy shop.

It usually takes one hour to get my call phone fully charged.

The man was charged for being irresponsible for the job in the court.

We gave her the charge of the house when we were away for holiday.

What is the charge for using the hall?

The guide conducted the tourists around the museum.

How well does this material conduct electricity or heat?

The concert on this Saturday evening will be conducted by a world famous conductor.

The teacher scolded him because of his bad conduct.

The manager conducted the business carefully.

He was surprise to see so many crosses marked in his Maths homework.

This fruit is a cross between an apple an d appear.

The river was too deep to cross.

The two main roads cross in the center of the town.

He crossed his name off the list.

2). Group work

Discuss in groups to think about more words of this kind and make sentences according to the different meanings. Then read it out and the other students try to guess the meaning of the same word in different situations.

Step 3 Imagination

Group work

Show some words on the screen ( such as bank, tie, sharp, tear) . Discuss in groups to make a short story, paying great attention to the different meanings and gender of the same word. Write it down on a card and share it with the whole class. See which group does the best job.

Step 4 Compound words

Sometimes if we put two different words together, we can make a new one. These words are called “Compound words”. Show some examples:

Blackboard is compounded with two words:

Part 1= a kind of deep color Part 2= a piece of thin wood

Show the students the formulation: Part 1 + Part 2 = ?

1). Class work

The teacher provide explanations to two single words. Ask the students to combine them together and then guess what the new word is. Repeat it for several groups.

Part 1= part of the body used when we talk Part 2= a round thing to play with

Part 1= water of ten degrees below zero Part 2= medicine to put on your skinPart 1= a liquid you need to make tea

Part 2= moving in snow with wooden thing tied to your shoes

2). Group work

Discuss to think of some some compound words in groups and then do the same game with the partners.

3) Class work

Have a competition about word guessing and see which team can give the most wonderful performance.

Two students to make a team with one facing the blackboard and the other facing all the students. The teacher lists some compound

words on the screen. The students facing the Bb explains the two parts of the compound word as quickly and exactly as possible, so

that the other one can join the two parts together to guess which word is mentioned. The game is limited in two minutes and then they

can find out which team have guessed more words than the others.

Step 5 Post-learning

Read the story about “Franklin’s famous kite experiment” again , and try to find out all the similar words as those learned in this class.

Homework:

Task 1. Design an exercise to match the words in Column A with those in Column B to make some compound words. Exchange the exercises in class.

Task 2. Prepare to make up a story about the relationship of humans and animals in groups and then act the short play out.

Period 6 Integrating skills

Learning Aims

1. Get the students to have reading extension for scientific experiments.

2. Enable students to write an argumentative essay by discussion.

Learning Procedures

Step 1 warming- up

(1). Class work

Daily report: A short play about the relationship between humans and animals.

Q: What do you learn from it?

(2). Class work

Enjoy some pictures about animals killed by humans:

Q: Why do people kill so many animals? Can it be avoided?

(3). Class work

Q: Why do scientists do experiments on animals?

What would often be the result? Can it be avoided?

Step 2 Reading

(1). Individual work

Can scientists make experiments on animals to test new products? People have different opinions about the problem. Let’s read such a passage now.

Q: How many questions are mentioned?

( Does animals testing work? Do people have the right to use animals?)

(2). Individual work

People are having a heat argument about the problem. And if you were an animal, what do you think would say to humans beings?

Prepare to make a short speech and speak it out.

(3). Group work

As a human being, do you agree with which side? A reporter is very interested in this argument, and he is having an interview with some people. Discuss the problem in groups, one as the reporter to hold the interview, one as a scientist who sticks to testing on animals, one as an activist who is against the idea and the other one tries to make some suggestions and notes. Exchange ideas with each other with the information in the reading material as well as your own opinions. Do the report and share your conclusions with the whole class.

(4). Group work

It’s really difficult for us to judge who is right or wrong. So in order to avoid such an argument, do you have some betters methods to solve problem, especially in the future? Discuss the problem in groups and reach an conclusion.

Step 3 Writing

(1). Pair work

Now it’s time for you to write about an argumentative essay on this problem. So what do you think you are going to write about in your essay? Discuss in pairs and show the ideas to the class.

(2). Individual work

Read the tips carefully to check if you have the same idea.

Title Choose a clear Pro or Contra animal testing title

Introduction Explain for what reasons animals are used in experiments and make clear on which side you are: Is animal testing OK or are you an animal rights activist?

Second Paragraph: Arguments Pro Choose two or three arguments from the reading to support your view, Explain them in your own words: 2-3 pros.

Third Paragraph: Arguments Contra Choose one or two arguments from the reading that do against your view. Explain them in your own words and show that they are not true: 1-2 cons

Conclusion Write what we should do with animals experiments in the future and why.

(3). Individual work

Then Write down your answers to the questions listed in the form one by one.

Why are animals used in the experiments?

Are you on which side of them?

Which views do you agree with? Why?

Which views don’t you agree with? Why?

What other ways can you think of to solve the problem in the future?

(4). Individual work

Join your answers together to make a short passage. Divide them into several different paragraphs according to what you write about in each one. Read it through with your partners to make sure what should be corrected and improved.

(5). Class work

To make your essay read well, some useful words will help you a lot when your are writing an argumentative one. Read these words carefully, and choose to use some of them in your essay and then read it again to see what has changed.

比较说明常用词语：

similarly , the same as, similar to ,equal to, appear the same, both seem to, in the same way, in a similar way, in comparison with share…in common/ have….in common, compare …with…, be compared with, make a comparison between with… there are some similarities between…

对比说明常用词语：

nevertheless/nonetheless otherwise, whereas in contrast, on the contrary opposite to…, different from, on the other hand, have little/nothing in common there are some difference between…

举例常用词语：

for example/instance, as follows, such as, in particular in this case, one example is…and another example is… take ….as an example, the following examples will show that… there are many examples to show that….

表示总结的常用词语：

in a word, generally speaking, in my opinion, to sum up, on the whole ,

Homework:

Task 1. Experience the life in your hometown with heart, and find out what people are talking about heatedly. Write them down and choose one to write about. Before writing, interview some people’s views about it, and then judge which side you are on. Write a letter to the local government to show your opinions.

Task 2. Fill in the assessment form below:

Self-assessment

Learner log for unit 16 Class Name No:

In this unit, you’ve learned about scientists and experiments. How comfortable do you feel like practicing each of the skills below?

1=Not comfortable 2=Need more practice 3=Comfortable 4=Very comfortable

Skills Comfort level

Talk about science and scientists 1 2 3 4 General assessment

Learn how to give instructions 1 2 3 4

Study some rules of word formation 1 2 3 4

Use new words and expressions 1 2 3 4

Learn to write an argumentative essay 1 2 3 4

Reflection

What is the most important thing you have learned in this unit?

What do you think you did best in this unit?

What do you find the most difficult in this unit?

Where do you see the best improvement?

Where do you need to work hard?

Group assessment

姓名

小组发言次数

全班发言次数

提出问题个数

解决问题个数

查找资料个数

与人合作次数

总体评价

Unit 16

Period 3 Reading

Benjamin Franklin’s Famous Kite Experiment

一，Teaching Aims:

1. To get to know something about the story of famous scientists.

2. To enable students to understand the given material better using different reading skills.

3. To have a better understanding about the importance of experiments in science.

二，Teaching Focus:

Students can understand the passage and do the experiment as Franklin did.

三，Teaching Aids: computer

四，Learning Procedures：

Step 1 Leading in

Do you know more about Benjamin Franklin? He performed his celebrated experiment with the kite in 1752. Today , let’s read about this great man.

Step 2 Reading

Individual work

Skimming: Read the material fast to find out the right picture about Franklin’s experiment.

Step 3: True or false

(1). In 1752 scientists already knew what electricity is.

(2). Franklin was helped by a friend to do the experiment.

(3). Franklin made the kite of silk because wet silk does not conduct electricity.

(4). A condenser was used in the experiment to store electricity.

(5). The key tied to the string was put into the door to stop the kite from flying away.

(6). The experiment can be done at any time.

(7). You can feel clear electric shock if you touch the string with your fingers after the kite is flying in the sky.

Step 4: Equipment :

a handkerchief made of silk ,two pieces of light wood,strings, a sharp piece of metal,

a key ,a silk ribbon

Step 5: Acting

Class work

There are seven steps for making a kite. Ss underline them and then draw a picture of the kite as the one made by Franklin.

Retell the steps of the experiment according to the following words.

Instructions:

1.the frame , by , light wood 2.tie , the corners , to ,cross 3.add , a tail, frame

4.tie, a string , the cross 5.tie, a piece of metal, stick 6.fasten, a key, string

7.tie , a ribbon, string

Step 6: Further understanding

Read through the passage to fill in the blanks in the form in pairs.

equipment usage

a kite

a key

a condenser

a sharp metal

strings

a silk ribbon

Step 7 : Discuss the following questions in groups:

(1). Why did Franklin do his experiment with a kite?

(2). Why the kite made of silk is better than the one made of paper?

(3). Is it dangerous for Franklin to do the experiment? Why do you think so?

(4). What can you learn from the experiment and also Franklin?

五， Homework:

Franklin was doing the experiment with his little son, and he was a bit curious about what his father was doing. Make a dialogue in pairs between Franklin and his son .

六，Self-evaluation:

篇15：NSEFC2B Unit 16 全单元教案1(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

Unit 16 The United States of America

Ⅰ.Brief Statements Based on the Unit

The United States of America is a developed country and also a booming country,which has a history of only 200~300 years.After the USA was founded,the American Civil War broke out in 1861,which brought suffering to the people of the USA,especially those in the South.Rebuilding the South became an essential task at that time.This unit mainly talks about the rebuilding and development of the American South.And Atlanta is a good illustration.It also deals with the bison on the plains of America.Because the bison was killed in huge numbers by European settlers,the balance of the whole wildlife was destroyed.After learning the unit,we let the students learn about the early history of America.Besides,some useful expressions and phrases should be mastered,and Non-finite verbs need to be reviewed,especially their passive forms.

Ⅱ.Teaching Goals

1.Talk about the USA.

2.Practise describing places.

3.Review Non-finite Verbs(2).

4.Write a comparison essay.

Ⅲ.Background Information

1.The American Civil War

The war of 1861~1865 between the northern states (the Union) and the southern states (the Confederacy) is also called the War between the States or the War of the Rebellion.There were many causes,of which the most important were disagreement over slavery,and the quarrel concerning Federal control and States’ Rights.The direct cause of the war was the election of Lincoln as President;this was followed by the secession of the southern states from the Union and the founding of the Confederacy,with Jefferson Davis as its President.The North had many advantages,a far greater population,more railway lines,and more factories.But the Confederates fought hard and were at first successful:they won the battles of Bull Run and Fredericksburg;but then Lee was defeated at Gettysburg and the Union army led by Grant won control of Mississippi.Admiral Farragant forced New Orleans to surrender:Texas,Arkansas and Louisiana were cut off from the rest of the Confederacy.After the Union won the Vicksburg campaign,Sherman made his march through Georgia to the sea,and Lee surrendered to Grant at Appomatton Court House,Virginia,on April 9,1865.Lincoln was assassinated in the same month.Slavery was declared unconstitutional.The period after the war (Reconstruction),when the South was occupied by the Worth,left bitterness that has not yet entirely vanished.During Reconstruction the southern states were admitted back into the Union.

2.The War of American Independence

(Also called the Revolutionary War 1775~1783)

The struggle of the thirteen British colonies in North America for independence ended in the forming of the USA.The main causes of the war were taxes imposed by the British government,e.g.the Stamp Tax of 1765 and the Tea Tax.The colonies rebelled in 1775;the first shots were fired at Lexington,and the First battle was faught at Bunker Hill.The continental Congress appointed General Washington as leader of its forces,and issued the Declaration of Independence on July 4,1776.General Burgoyne led a British army down from Canada but was forced to surrender at Saratoga (Oct.1777).He was supposed to meet the army of General Howe,who managed to occupy Philadelphia.Washington spent the hard winter of 1777~1778 at Valley Forge,and had difficulty in keeping his men together,France (1778),Spain (1779)and the Netherlands (1780)joined the war against Britain.British forces under Cornwallis won victories in the South where Britain had some popular support,but Cornwallis was defeated at Yorktown,Virginia,and forced to surrender (Oct.19/1781),which practically brought the war to an end.At sea,Britain had to fight to keep her naval supremacy,but after Yorktown the American ports were lost one by one.The war was ended by the Treaty of Paris,1783,which recognized the independence of the USA.

3.Slavery in the United States

The African ancestors (祖先) of today’s black Americans were brought to the US as slaves in the seventeenth,eighteenth,and nineteenth centuries.They worked on farms,especially the large farms in the southern states.Slowly they became a necessary part of the economic (经济) system (体制) of the South.

Slaves did not have the right of people;according to the law,they were a “thing” which belonged to the person who bought them.They had to obey the orders of their owners without questions.They were not allowed to learn to read;their owners feared the educated slaves would begin to think about the injustice of the system and would learn to struggle for their freedom.Slaves had to work long hours in very unhealthy conditions.Their owners had complete power over them.They could be bought and sold like animals.At the slave markets,black children were separated from their parents and never allowed to see them again.Slave owners had the right to punish the slaves who broke the law or was against the system.Slaves were often beaten or even killed by their owners.After the Civil War,one free slave reported that his owner killed an older slave who was teaching him to read.In theory an owner who treated a slave badly could be punished.In practice,however,the law meant nothing.

Opposition to slavery began very early in the history of the US-in 1671-but little progress was made until the beginning of the nineteenth century.By 1804 slavery was illegal (非法的) in the northern states.But it continued,and even grew,in the southern states,which depended on cotton for their economic wealth.Slavery,ended in the South only after the Civil War.For blacks,however,the end of slavery was only a beginning,the late beginning of a long and difficult struggle for true justice.

Ⅳ.Teaching Time:Five periods

The First Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn about the USA.

2.Do some listening.

3.Practise describing places to train the students’ speaking ability.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Train the students’ listening ability.

2.Improve the students’ speaking ability by practising describing places using the following useful sentence patterns:

How long/wide/high/tall is the…?

It’s…metres/feet long/wide/high/tall.

There is…in the North.

It looks like…

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to improve the students’ listening ability.

2.How to help the students carry out the task of speaking.

Teaching Methods:

1.Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.

2.Discussion to help the students learn about the US.

3.Individual,pair or group work to make every student have a chance to work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Lead-in

T：Now,let’s begin our class.First,I’ll give you some information about the history of a country.Please guess which country it is.Listen carefully.It is a very young country in the world,which has only a history of 200~300 years.Most people in the country are immigrates The head office of the UN was set up there.Two World Wars didn’t take place there.Now it is the strongest country of the world.Can you guess it?

Ss:Yes.The USA.

Step Ⅲ Warming-up

T:You’re right.Today we’re going to learn Unit 16 The United States of America (Bb:Unit 16 The United States of America).Now,let’s have a quiz to see how much you know about the USA.(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

Decide if the following sentences are true or false.Write“T”or“F”in the brackets.

1.New York is the largest state in the US. ( )

2.Most state names come from Spanish or English. ( )

3.Atlanta is known as the“Big Apple”. ( )

4.The Constitution was written in 1779. ( )

5.There are 52 stars on the American flag. ( )

6.George Washington was the first American President. ( )

7.The first settlers arrived in North America about 30 000 years ago. ( )

8.The Mississippi River is the longest river in the world. ( )

T:Well,please do it by yourselves.After a while,I’ll check your answers.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

(After a few minutes,teacher checks the students’ answers.)

T:The first one,true or false?

S1:False.

T:Please correct it.

S1:New York is the largest city in the US.

T:Good.The second one?

S2:True.

T:What about the third one?

S3:False.New York is known as the “Big Apple”.

…

Suggested answers:

4.F The Constitution was written in 1787.

5.F There are 50 stars on the American flag.

6.T

7.T

8.F The Mississippi is one of the important rivers in the world.

T:A good job!Now,open your books and turn to Page 41.Please look at the map of the USA and find out the following cities and states:New York,Washington,Florida,Taxas, California,Alaska.

(A few minutes later,teacher says the following.)

T:Please look at the first picture.What place is it?Any volunteer?

S4:It is the famous White House,where the president of the US works and lives with his family.

T:Do you know how it got its name?

S4:No.

T:Who knows?

S5:At first,it was made of gray stone and called the President’s Palace.During the war of 1812,it was burned by British soldiers.Afterwards,it was rebuilt.The walls were painted white to cover up marks left by the fire.Then people began calling the President’s Palace the White House.The name caught on and has remained in use ever since.

T:Wonderful!Next,let’s look at the second picture.It is a famous city,which is it?

S6:New York.

T:Right.Can you guess when the picture was taken?

S6:I think it was taken before the date September 11,2001.

T:How do you know?

S6:Because in the picture,we can see many skyscrapers.Among them,the World Trade Centre and the Empire State Building are most famous,but now the World Trade Centre has already gone.It was exploded by terrorists.

T:Oh,What a pity!Do you know anything else about New York?

Ss:No.

T:New York is America’s cultural capital,where there is the statue of Liberty,the skyscrapers,了the beautiful shops on Fifth Avenue,and the many theatres on Broadway.Manhattan,the smallest island in New York,is the real centre of the city.When people say “New York City” they usually mean Manhattan.In 1605,the first Europeans came to Manhattan from Holland.They bought the island from the American Indians for a few glass necklaces,worth about $26.The most crowded part of New York is perhaps Harlem,where most Black Americans live.The crime rate is among the highest in the Western world.I hope one day some of you will have a chance to visit it.Do you have enough confidence?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Now,work in pairs or groups.Make a list of things you know about the USA and what you’d like to know more about.(Teacher may encourage the students to make a chart.Several minutes later,teacher collects their charts.)

Sample diagram:

Step Ⅳ Listening

T:OK.We have talked more about the USA.Now let’s listen to a radio programme about New York to help Wang Xiao correct the errors in her notes.Turn to the next page.Let’s look at Ex.1 in the listening part.Here are the notes taken by Wang Xiao after he listens to a radio programme about New York.First read it by yourself.Then I’ll play the tape for you to listen.After that,please correct his errors.

(Teacher plays the tape for the first time.After playing it,teacher gives the students one or two minutes to do Ex.1.At last,teacher checks the answers with the whole class.)

T:OK.Now let’s listen to the tape again and then answer some concerned questions.Before listening,you need to go through with the questions.(Teacher gives the students one minute to read the questions.Then play the tape for the second time.After that,give the students enough time to discuss the answers and check them.)

T:Well done.Please listen to Part 2 of the listening material and then choose the best answers to the question in Ex.3.

(Teacher deals with Ex.3 in the same way.If necessary,play the tape again.)

Step Ⅴ Speaking

T:Everyone loves his own hometown,which is beautiful in their hearts.Now,let’s talk about our hometown.Tell me where your hometown is,Wang Kai.

S7:My hometown lies on the plain of North China.

T:Are there any mountains,rivers or forests?

S7:Yes.There is the famous Mount Taihang to the west,Fenhe River in the centre and a railway from Datong to Fenglingdu across my hometown.

T:What does the landscape look like?

S7:Very beautiful.There are thick forests,clean rivers and pleasant climate.Resources of minerals are also rich,which is called “the Sea of Coal”.Many places of interest,like the ancient city Pingyao,Yungang Rock Cave and Mount Wutai are famous in the world.

T:Well done!Now,look at the last part-Speaking at Page 42.Let’s do some speaking.Choose one of the cards and ask each other questions.You can use a map to help you.Before speaking,please look at the sentence patterns on the screen.They may be of great help to you.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

How long/wide/high/tall is the…?

It’s…metres/feet long/wide/high/tall.

There is…in the North.

It looks like…

Can you make a sentence using each sentence pattern on the screen?

Ss:Yes.

T:Who can try the first sentence pattern?

S8:How tall is the building?

T:Yes.Answer the question,please.

S8:It’s about 100 feet tall.

T:Very good.Make a sentence with the next sentence pattern.Any volunteer?

S9:There is a famous mountain in the north.

T:OK.Sit down,please.The last one?

S10:It looks like a bird’s nest.

T:Good job!Now,work in pairs to talk about your hometown.Ater a while,I’ll ask some students to act out their dialogues before the class.Are you clear about that?

Ss:Yes.

T:Begin,please.

(Teacher goes among the students and joins them.)

T:(After a few minutes)Are you ready?

Ss:Yes.

T:Who’d like to act out your dialogue in front of the class?

(Two students stand up and act out their dialogue before the class.)

Sample dialogue:

A:Could you tell me where your hometown is?

B:My hometown is on the plain of North China,which has a population of 5 000.

A:Is it beautiful?

B:Yes.It lies to the east of Mount Taihang and west of Haihe River.The railway from Beijing to Guangzhou crosses it.There is fertile land,rich resources,simple people and developed trade.It is a brilliant pearl on the plain.

A:Very beautiful!Would you like to take me to visit your hometown if possible?

B:Of course.I’m glad to act as your guide.What about your hometown?

A:On the Loess Plateau lies my hometown.

B:The Loess Plateau?It must be very inaccessible and backward.

A:No.My hometown is not far from the Yellow River,which is more than 5 000 metres long.The traffic is convenient,four seasons clear,climate cool and resources of minerals rich,like coal,iron…I believe my hometown will become more beautiful in the near future.

Step Ⅵ Summary and Homework

T:In this class,we’ve mainly learnt something about the USA by speaking and listening.Besides,we’ve talked about our hometown using the useful sentence patterns,such as:How long/wide/high/tall is the…?It’s…metres/feet long/wide/high/tall.…(Teacher writes them on the blackboard.)After class,surf the Internet to get more information about the USA,such as the history of the USA.At last,don’t forget to preview the reading passage.That’s all for today.Class is over.

Step Ⅶ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 16 The United States of America

The First Period

Useful Sentence Patterns:

How long/wide/high/tall is the…?

It’s…metres/feet long/wide/high/tall.

There is…in the North.

It looks like…

Step Ⅷ Record after Teaching

篇16：NSEFC2B Unit 14 全单元教案4(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

The Fourth Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Read the text and grasp the main idea of it.

2.Do some exercises to master what they’ve learnt.

3.Learn to write an essay.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students’ reading ability by reading a text.

2.Improve the students’ writing ability by reading and writing.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to improve the students’ integrating skills.

2.How to write an essay.

Teaching Methods:

1.Practice to make the students master what they’ve learnt.

2.Asking-and-answering method to help the students grasp the main idea.

3.Discussion to make every student understand the topic clearly.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings and Revision

T:(Greet the whole class as usual.)In the last period,we’ve learnt some useful words and expressions.Now,let’s do an exercise to revise them.Look at the screen,please.You may have a discussion,if you like.

(Show the following on the screen and let the students prepare for a moment.Finally,ask some students to say their answers and correct their mistakes,if any.)

Choose the proper words to complete the following sentences,using the proper forms:

prison housing peaceful march murder forbid set a good example demand

1.Too many people are living in bad ______ conditions.

2.If some people are on a ______,they walk together in a large group through the street to express their ideas.

3.Black people in Alabama ______that the bus company should not separate blacks from whites.

4.Lei Feng ______ to us in serving the people heart and soul.

5.In the American history,two former presidents Abraham Lincoln and John F.Kennedy were ______.

6.Smoking is ______ in our school now.Our school is a non-smoke school.

7.The man who robbed a bank of our city was caught last Sunday and put in ______now.

8.When I arrived in Qingdao,the sea there was ______ and beautiful.Many people jumped into it and had a bath.

Suggested answers:

1.housing

2.march

3.demanded

4.set a good example

5.murdered

6.forbidden

7.prison

8.peaceful

Step Ⅱ Fast Reading

T:Well done!(Show the questions on the screen.)Now,we’ll begin a new text.Please turn to Page 30 and read the passage fast and find answers to the questions on the screen.)

Answer the following questions:

1.Which country was the first in the world to give women the right to vote?

2.Who wrote two chapters about the rights of animals and vegetables in a novel?And when?

(Three minutes later)

T:Who can answer the first question?

S:I’ll try.The answer is that New Zealand was the first country to give women the right to vote.

T:Do you agree with him/her?

Ss:Yes.

T:Good.Now,who knows the answer to the second question?

S:Let me have a try.Samuel Butler wrote two chapters about the rights of animals and the right of vegetables in a novel in 1872.

T:Very good.Please sit down.

Step Ⅲ Reading

T:(Show the questions on the screen.)Now please read the text again and discuss the questions on the screen with your partner.Later we’ll check the answers together.

Discuss the following questions:

1.“Each age has its own struggle for right.”What does the word “age” mean?

2.What were the main ideas of the famous books about the rights of men and women,which were published in the late 18th to the 19th century?

3.Please describe the rights to vote for women in the 19th and the 20th century.

4.What is the purpose of the organizations that fight for equal rights in modern times?

5.Do you think we should fight for the rights of robots and machines?

(The students read the text and discuss the questions.Then the teacher may ask some of the students to say their answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.The word “age” means “time”,for Chinese “时代”.

2.The main ideas of these books were that all people are brothers and sisters,and that all people should be equal.From then on,a struggle of more than 200 years for equal rights of men and women of all races began.

3.There was a time when women had no rights to vote.In the 19th century,women all over the world began to ask for equal rights.It is New Zealand that is the first country in the world to give women the right to vote in 1893.By 1920,the US,Canada and most European countries allowed the women to vote.

4.They fight for the rights of black people,women,children,people with AIDS/HIV and prisoners.Their purpose is that they ask to be treated with respect,share the rights to work,good housing conditions and education and to be treated equal to other people in all ways.

5.I don’t think so.We should protect all the living things,including plants and animals,because all of them are part of nature.If one of them is not well protected,the balance of nature will be destroyed.That will perhaps cause another living thing to die out.No matter which of them dies out,our nature will lose some of its color.Robots and machines are made by man.We can decide how many of them will be needed,according to their use.If we need more,we can make more.That will not affect the balance of nature.And I think we should protect our oceans and earth,too.

T:That’s a very good topic.You can continue discussing it after class,if you like.It will be very interesting.

Step Ⅳ Reading Aloud and Practice

T:Now,let’s listen to the tape.I’ll play it twice.The first time I play the tape,listen carefully.The second time I play it,you can read after the tape.After that,you read the text aloud,paying much attention to the pronunciation and intonation.

(Play the tape for students to listen and repeat.Then give them several minutes to read aloud.At last,ask a couple of students to read the text.)

T:Very good.(Show the phrases on the screen.)Now,please look at the screen.Make sentences with the phrases shown on the screen.You can do it in pairs.

Make sentences with the following phrases:

in modern times believe in

start with a time

have…in common with respect

in all ways ask for

Sample sentences:

in modern times:

In modern times many peasants are very rich.

believe in:

You can believe in him;he’ll never let you down.

start with:

The school started with 300 pupils;now there are double that number.

a time:

I don’t care for the place at first,but after a time I got to like it.

have…in common:

Real friends should have everything in common.

with respect:

We should treat everybody with respect.

in all ways:

All the people should be treated equally in all ways.

ask for:

She entered it,asked for a cup of tea,and sat down.There’s been a gentleman here asking for you.

Step Ⅴ Writing

T:Now,let’s do some writing practice.First look at the information on Page 31.Read it and then work out the details for King’s action in Birmingham after the example.Pair work.A few minutes later,we’ll check the answers.

(Students begin to prepare and after a while,the teacher says the following.)

T:Have you finished?

Ss:Yes.

T:Who would like to give us the answer?

S:I’ll try.King wanted new civil rights law to give blacks equal rights.What is wrong now:Only 25% of the blacks can vote.How should it be improved:All the citizens can vote,no matter what race they are.

S:King wanted the right of free marriages for blacks.What is wrong now:Mixed race marriages are forbidden by law.How should it be improved:All the people can choose their marriages by themselves.

S:King wanted the right of receiving equal education.What is wrong now:Black children are taught in separate schools,and the money spent on educating a black child is much less than that spent on a white child.How should it be improved:Black children and white children can in the same school to have their classes.

…

T:Well done!Now,read the second information and discuss what we should do with your partner.

(A moment later,check the answers.)

Suggested answers:

Rights People Animals/Plants Robots/Machines

Housing big enough house big enough room big enough room

Nutrition enough nutrition enough nutrition keep in good repair

Work eight hours can’t be made to work too long can’t work too long

Health and care keep healthy keep healthy take good care of

Respect treat with respect treat with respect ×

Vote have the right to vote × ×

Step Ⅵ Summary and Homework

T:In this class,we’ve learned a text “No voice,not heard…” and done some exercises.There are some useful expressions in the text.Can you remember them?Li Jian,can you tell us?(The student tells the useful expressions to the class and the teacher writes them on the blackboard.)Good.After class,you should make sentences with the expressions on the blackboard and finish Exercises 3,4 and 5 on Page 32.That’s all for today.See you tomorrow!

Ss:See you tomorrow!

Sample essay:

People,animals and plants are all living in one home-our earth.People are in charge of everything.They should live comfortable.That is to say,they should have big enough house to live in and have enough nutrition to keep them healthy.Besides,they should have regular medical care.People should respect each other and help each other.They should not work too long or too tired.They should have the right to vote.So it is with animals and plants,though they don’t need the right to vote.Our earth is beautiful and full of vigor,owing to all the animals and plants.We should take care of them,and let them live comfortable and freely.Some of the animals can help us work or do other things for us.We should treat them with respect.For example,we should not make them work too long or make them too tired.Let’s live together with our animals and plants happily!Suppose what a sad world our earth would be if there were no animals and plants at all!We should be friends with them forever.

Step Ⅶ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 14 Freedom fighters

The Fourth Period

Useful expressions:

believe in start with

ask for in modern times

have…in common with respect

in all ways

Step Ⅷ Record after Teaching

篇17：NSEFC2B Unit 20 全单元教案1(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

Ⅰ.Brief Statements Based on the Unit

Archaeological discoveries play an important part in the study of the history and culture of a country and at the same time can help us solve many mysteries.This unit mainly talks about two important archaeological discoveries:the King of Stonehenge in England and the Jinsha Ruins and the Sanxingdui Ruins Site in Sichuan Province.The discovery of the King of Stonehenge makes archaeologists think people in the Bronze Age had trade and cultural links with other parts in Europe.While the unearthed Jinsha Ruins again proved that it is likely that roots of Chinese culture are in Sichuan.They all have a historical significance on the study of the history and culture of the two countries.Besides,we need to review the use of “it”,especially when it is used in the subject position to stand for an infinitive or a clause.

Ⅱ.Teaching Goals

1.Talk about archaeological discoveries.

2.Express curiosity.

3.Review the use of “It”.

4.Create a flow chart.

Ⅲ.Background Information

1. Underwater Archaeology

The year was 1960.The eight team members were divers and scientists.The ancient wreck（船的残骸）was buried in the sands below the warm coastal waters off Turkey.Underwater archaeology was about to be born.

Archaeology is the study of ancient life,or how people lived thousands of years ago.The work of the archaeologist is to find and recover objects made by these ancient people and figure out how the objects were used.

The archaeologists on the team that found the ancient wreck usually worked on dry land.They knew the scientific methods used in dry-land archaeology.By adapting,or changing,these methods,the archaeologists could use them under water.After diving into the sea,the group used underwater cameras to take pictures of the wreck and its treasures.Next,they drew maps on plastic tablets to show where each object was located.Then,they used a tool that gently sucked the sand away from the treasures.Large objects were placed in baskets,which were brought up to the surface.Very heavy objects were pulled up with the aid of a balloon.

The recovered objects were put in a museum in Turkey.Archaeologists then brought the photos,drawings,and maps to the United States for further research.After seven years of study,the scientists learned that the wreck was 3 200 years old.

2.Spanish scientists dig up a monster of a bone

Spanish researchers digging in a semi-desert part of eastern Spain have found a bone from an animal more than 30 metres in length and weighing 50 tons.The upper leg bone measures 1.85 metres and weighs 150 kilograms.This indicated that it came from the equivalent of a male elephant.

Scientists believe the bone came from a Sauropod,a lizard-like dinosaur that lived from 145 to 65 million years BC.

If these guesses are confirmed,it would be the largest dinosaur discovered in Europe.

It could possibly be as big as a champion heavy weight like Argentinausorus,found in South America,which from the evidence of a foot and three ribs,was probably longer than 35 metres.

The four-legged Sauropods,which had tiny brains,vast stomachs and long necks and tails,are believed to have been vegetarians,eating large trees the way people crunch celery sticks.

Ⅳ.Teaching Time:Five periods

The First Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the following words:

archaeology archaeological archaeologist curiosity decoration unearth spear artefact

2.Do some listening.

3.Learn to express curiosity.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students’ listening ability.

2.Train the students’ speaking ability by talking about archaeological discoveries and practising expressing curiosity.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to improve the students’ listening ability.

2.How to finish the task of speaking.

Teaching Methods:

1.Looking at some pictures to arouse the students’ interest in archaeology.

2.Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.

3.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Lead-in

T：As we all know,China is a country with an ancient civilization.It has a long history and brilliant culture.Do you know in what ways we can learn about its history and culture?

S1:Reading books.

S2:Watching TV.

S3:Learning from the teacher in class.

S4:Surfing the Internet.

…

T:Anything else?

Ss:No.

T:We can also go to the museum to visit the unearthed cultural relics,can’t we?

Ss:Yes.

T:Now,please look at the two pictures on the screen and tell me what you see in the pictures.

(Teacher shows the screen.)

S5:They are:terracotta warriors and horses and inscriptions on bones or tortoise shells.

T:You’re right.Terracotta warriors and horses is a symbol of the powerful Qin Dynasty,while inscriptions on bones or tortoise shells are embryonic forms of Chinese characters.The great archaeological discoveries play an important part in learning about China.

Step Ⅲ Warming up

T:Today let’s talk about archaeology Unit 20 (Bb:Unit 20 Archaeology).Before talking,please look at the new words.

(Teacher deals with the new words with the whole class.)

T:OK.Now open your books and turn to Page 73.Look at the four pictures and tell us what you can see in each picture.

S6:I can see an axe in the first picture.It is a kind of tool used by people of the Stone Age.

T:Right.How about the second one?

S7:In the second picture is a bronze tripod,which is an ancient cooking vessel of that period.

T:Good.The third picture.Li Ping,try please.

S8:This is a painting on silk of the Han Dynasty.

T:Yeah.The last one?

S9:I think the last picture is a work of China made in the Tang Dynasty.

T:Anything else about the last picture?

S10:I guess it is made of tri-colored glazed pottery of the Tang Dynasty.

T:Well done.We know that the life of people is different during the different periods.Now let’s describe the life of people during the periods mentioned above.You can describe it according to the questions on the screen.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

1.What did they eat?

2.Where did they live?

3.What did their homes look like?

4.What kind of tools did they use?

5.What objects have we found from their age?

6.What kind of entertainment did they have?

First discuss the questions with your partner,and then complete the chart at Page 73.A few minutes later,I’ll collect your answers.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:(Five minutes later.)Are you ready now?(Ss:Yes.)Now,let’s describe the life of people in the Stone Age together.

T and Ss:The people of the Stone Age ate wild fruits and animals.They usually lived in caves.They used bones of animals,fur and pottery to decorate their caves.The tools they used were mainly stones,sticks and bones of animals.They used bones of animals to make necklaces and bone pins.They were able to make jades.The entertainment for them was to shout and dance with rhythm together.

T:OK.Who’d like to describe the life of people in the Bronze Age,the Han Dynasty and the Tang Dynasty one by one like what we did just now?

Ss:…

Suggested answers:

Stone Age Bronze Age Han Dynasty Tang Dynasty

Food wild fruits, wild animals grain,wheat,rice,bean,domestic,animals,meat,broomcorn,millet wheat,rice,wine,vegetables,sugar pancake,tea,spinach,wine

Housing caves houses made of mud and straw houses made of bricks and tiles houses made of bricks and tiles palaces

Home

Decoration Bones of animals, fur, pottery, jade bronze mirrors,bronze jade silk,stone and brick statues, wood statues,frescoes china,pottery,jade,silk

Tools

stones, sticks, bones, axes made of stone knives, sickles, axes, fishhooks

iron objects,ploughs,hoes

Quyuan ploughs,tools used to lift water by water-wheel

Artefacts

necklaces made of bones,bone pins,pottery,jade bronze tripods and quadripods,textile,embroidery silk, paintings on silk, stone, brick and wood statues tri-colored glazed pottery of the Tang Dynasty,China

Entertain-ment

shouting and dancing with rhythm singing,dancing,drinking wine

playing the instruments acrobatic show

having a swing,boat race,playing polo

T:We know there are many important discoveries from these different periods.Please look at the following four pictures.Can you tell us where they were unearthed and where we can go and see them?Discuss in groups of four.After a few minutes,I’ll ask some students to talk about them.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

(Teacher shows the four pictures on the screen.)

1 3

2 4

T:Liu Qian,talk about the first picture,please.

S11:…

Suggested answers:

Picture 1:The picture shows the serials bells of the Warring States,which was unearthed in Sui County of Hubei Province.If you want to see it,you can go to Hubei Province.

Picture 2:This is the famous Dunhuang frescoes,which lie in Dunhuang of Gansu Province.They were painted in the Tang Dynasty.We can go to Dunhuang of Gansu Province to enjoy them.

Picture 3:This is a skull of a Peking ape-man,living in the Stone Age.Archaeologists found it in Zhoukou of Beijing.We may go to the Chinese History Museum to see it.

Picture 4:This is a work of coloured pottery.The persons were performing acrobatics.It was made in the Han Dynasty and unearthed in Luoyang of Henan Province.Luoyang is the place where you can enjoy the work of coloured pottery.

Step Ⅳ Listening

T:Now,let’s do some listening.Look at the Listening part at Page 74.Listen to the tape carefully and try to make a drawing of the tool.

(Teacher plays the tape for the students to listen for the first time.After that,give the students one or two minutes to draw it.If they have some difficulty with it,play the tape again and stop where there are important information related to the drawing.At last,check the drawing with the whole class.)

T:Good.Now,let’s go on with the exercises in Listening.Please listen to the tape again and then finish Ex.2 and 3 in turn.

(Teacher plays it again and gives the students enough time to write down some important information.Finally check the answers with the whole class.After that,let the students discuss Ex.4 in groups of four and check them.)

Step Ⅴ Speaking

T:OK.In our daily life,we often come across the topic that we’re interested in and we’re anxious to get some information about it.In order to get some suggestions from others,how do you express your curiosity?Now, look at the screen.These are very useful expressions.You should remember them and use them freely.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

I wonder what/who…

I really want to know…

I’m curious to…

I’d love to know…

I wonder if/whether…

What I’d really like to find out is…

I’m curious about…

I’d like to know more about…

(Teacher goes through the useful expressions with the whole class.)

T:Now,let’s listen to a dialogue between Student A and Student B.Student A talks about a topic he/she is interested in,while Student B gives suggestions.

(Teacher plays the tape for the students.After that,teacher says the following.)

T:Well,open your books and turn to Page 74.Look at Speaking.Please underline the sentences used to express curiosity.After a while.I’ll ask one of you to read out the sentences.Do you understand?

Ss:Yes.

T:(After a while)Have you finished?(Ss:Yes.)Any volunteer?

S12:I’d like to know more about…

I wonder what…

I’d love to know…

What I’d really like to find out is…

T:Quite right.Please practise the dialogue with your partner for a while.After that,I’ll ask some pairs to act out the dialogue before the class.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

(Several minutes later,teacher asks some pairs to act out the dialogue before the class.)

T:Thank your for your excellent performances.

Step Ⅵ Practice

T:Now,let’s do some speaking practice.Work in pairs or groups and talk about archaeological finds,such as artefacts,tombs or unearthed towns.You can use the expressions we learnt just now to help you carry out the task of speaking.Five minutes later,I’ll ask some pairs to perform their dialogues before the class.

One possible dialogue:

A:Hi!Jack.Have you heard of the Sanxingdui Ruins Site?

B:Yes.It’s in Guanghan of Sichuan Province.

A:I want to know when it was discovered?

B:In the spring of 1929.

A:Can you tell me who found it?

B:Yes.It’s a farmer’s son who found it.

A:I’m curious about how he found it.

B:He found it by chance.When he and his father were working in the field,he dug up a round piece of jade.Then they found a hole filled with more than 400 jade objects.

A:Oh,so strange!What I’d really like to know is what effects its discovery will have on the study of Chinese history and culture.

B:I think it must have important effects.It is said that it has become one of the cultural relics of the world.

A:Great!I’d like to know more about it.

B:You can surf the Internet or go to visit it yourself.

Step Ⅶ Summary and Homework

T:In this class,we’ve talked about archaeological discoveries and learnt about the life of people during the different periods.We’ve also done some listening practice and speaking practice.In the Speaking part,we’ve mainly learnt to express curiosity using the useful expressions.These expressions are:I wonder what/who…I’m curious to…I wonder if…(Teacher writes them on the blackboard.)After class,practise them more.Besides,remember to prepare for the next period.OK.That’s all.Class is over.

Step Ⅷ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 20 Archaeology

The First Period

Useful Expressions:

I wonder what/who…

I really want to know…

I’m curious to…

I’d love to know…

I wonder if/whether…

What I’d really like to find out is…

I’m curious about…

I’d like to know more about…

Step Ⅸ Record after Teaching

篇18：NSEFC2B Unit 20 全单元教案3(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

Teaching Aims:

1.Review some new words appearing in the last period.

2.Review the use of “It”.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Review the words used as a noun or a verb appearing in the reading passage and learn to complete sentences with their correct form…

2.Master the use of “It”.

Teaching Difficult Point:

The usage of “it” used in the subject position to stand for an infinitive or a clause,especially in the following sentence structure:

It is said/believed/reported/thought/known…that…

Teaching Methods:

1.Revision to help the students consolidate the words learnt in the last period.

2.Practise to help the students review the use of “It”.

3.Pair work or individual work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Revision

T:In the last period,we read a passage about the King of Stonehenge.Have you remembered anything about it?Who can retell the text briefly?

S1:Let me try.On May 3,2002,archaeologists found a grave of a man in England.Buried with him were some tools…

T:Very good.Thank you for your performance.

Step Ⅲ Word Study

T:In the reading passage we’ve learnt,there are some words which mean the same as the definitions I’ll give you.Now,listen to me carefully and then find the words and read them out.One student,one word.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Let’s begin.No 1:the ruler of an empire,higher than a king.

S2:Emperor.

T:Yes.No 2:the clothes that people wear.

S3:Clothing.

T:Good.No 3:a long stick with a sharp point,used as a weapon.

S4:Arrow.

T:No.Think it over.

S5:Knife.

T:Yes.Let’s go on.It means a deep round bowl used for cooking.Which word is it?

S6:I think the word is “pot”,isn’t it?

T:Yes.No 5:a thin weapon that you shoot with a bow.

S7:Arrow.

T:Right.The last one:the amount of space between two places.

S8:The word should be “distance”.

T:Very good.Now,please look at the screen.These words can be used as a noun or a verb.Can you say their meanings in Chinese?(Teacher shows the screen and let the students speak together.Meanwhile,give answers on the screen.)

T：Now,let’s do an exercise.Open your books at Page 77.Look at Ex.2 in Word Study.Complete the sentences with their correct form and change them into Chinese.I’ll give you a few minutes to prepare.After that,I’ll ask some students to do them.

T:OK.Time is up.Have you finished?

Ss:Yes.

T:Well.The first one.Any volunteer?

S9:The first blank should be filled in “date” used as a noun,while the second should be filled in “dates” used as a verb.Its Chinese meaning is:日期是2002年5月3日，考古学家在英格兰发现了一个男人的坟墓，此墓的历史可追溯到公元前大约2300年。

T：Very good.The second one?

S:…

Suggested answers:

1.dress;dressed

她喜欢黑颜色的裙子。她总是穿着黑色的衣服。

3.found;find

去年，考古学家发现了一个男人的坟墓，最令人感到惊奇的发现物就是两只金耳环。

4.transported;transport

没有人知道这些巨大的石头是怎样经过这样的一段距离被运输过来的，有人说可能是外星人帮助了他们。

5.trade;traded

中西方国家之间的贸易有着悠久的历史。他们用珠宝和医药换取中国的茶叶和丝绸。

6.pins;pin

我正在寻找一些钉子。我想把这幅漂亮的画钉在墙上。

Step Ⅳ Grammar

(Teacher shows some sentences on the screen.)

T:Do the sentences A and B in each pair have the same meaning?

Ss:Yes.Both of the two sentences in each pair have the same meaning.

T:Are there any differences?Who’d like to try the first pair?

S10:The subject of Sentence A is an infinitive phrase,while that of Sentence B is “It”.In Sentence B,“It” is used in the subject position to stand for the infinitive phrase.The reason why the sentence is written like that is that we want to keep the balance of the sentence.Am I right?

T:Yes.you’re right.Sentence B is more usual in everyday English.The second pair,Li Ping,try please.

S11:In Sentence A,the subject is a that-clause,while the subject of Sentence B is “It”,which is used in the subject position to stand for a clause.

T:Very good.The sentence structure “It is+adj.+an infinitive/a clause”is very useful in learning English.(Teacher writes the sentence structure on the blackboard.)Can you make a sentence with the sentence structure?

S12:Let me try.It is dangerous to go out alone at night.

T:Good.Wang Wei,make a sentence with the structure.

S13：It is natural that a child should love its mother.

(Teacher writes the two sentences the students made on the blackboard.)

T:Well done.Now.let’s do an exercise.Turn to Page 78 and look at Ex.1 in Grammar.Rewrite the following sentences using “it”.Five minutes later,I’ll check your answers.

Suggested answers:

1.It is a great honour for me to be able to join in the archaeological research project.

2.Thanks to modern technology,it is possible to find out more facts about the man buried in the grave.

3.It is still unknown whether the man organised the construction of Stonehenge.

4.It is a mystery how early men constructed Stonehenge without the use of modern technology.

T:You all did very well.Now,please look at the screen.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

In this pair,Sentence A and Sentence B have the same meaning.Sentence A includes a very useful sentence structure.Do you know what it is?

Ss:Yes.It is:It be+p.p.+that-clause.

(Teacher writes it on the blackboard.)

T:Look at the blackboard,please.Here “It”is also used in the subject position to stand for a clause,but it is different from what we reviewed just now.Is that so?

Ss:Yes.

T:The sentence pattern “It be+p.p.+that-clause”can often be changed into the sentence structure “People+vt.+that-clause”.The past participles used like that in the sentence structure are: reported, believed, thought, proven, known, hoped, suggested, etc.

(Teacher writes them on the blackboard.)

T:Are you clear about that?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Let’s do Ex.2 at Page 78.First do them by yourself,then check your answers with your partner.After a while,I’ll ask some of you to read out your sentences.

Suggested answers:

1.It was said that it was an important archaeological discovery.

2.It was reported that this man had been called the King of Stonehenge.

3.It is believed that the two gold earrings found on the man are the oldest gold ever found in Britain.

4.It is thought that European culture and techniques were brought to Britain through trade instead of war.

5.It has been proven that the copper knives came from Spain and Western France.

6.It is unknown to us how these huge stones were transported over a distance of 380 kilometres.

Step Ⅴ Consolidation

T:Now,please look at the screen.Translate the sentences into English using “it”.

1.据报道，数十名儿童在事故中死亡。

2.电脑有可能取代人的位置吗？

3.核对这些实验的结果是重要的。

4.处理这样的问题，对你来说是困难的。

5.独自一人去海里游泳是危险的。

6.众所周知，中国是一个文明古国。

Suggested answers:

1.It was reported that dozens of children died in the accident.

2.Is it possible that computers can take the place of human beings?

3.It is important that the experiment result should be checked.

4.It is difficult for you to deal with such a problem.

5.It is dangerous to go to swim in the sea alone.

6.It is well known that China is a country with an ancient civilization.

Step Ⅵ Summary and Homework

T:In this class,we’ve reviewed some new words appearing in the last period,especially some words used as noun or verb.We’ve also reviewed the use of “it”,which is used in the subject position to stand for an infinitive or a clause.After class,you need to do more exercises to consolidate what we’ve reviewed about the use of “it”.Besides,prepare for the next period.That’s all.See you tomorrow!

Ss:See you tomorrow!

Step Ⅶ The Design of the Writing on theBlackboard

Unit 20 Archaeology

The Third Period

Grammar:The use of “It”

Ⅰ.It is+adj.+an infinitive/a clause.

e.g.It is dangerous to go out alone at night.

It is natural that a child should love its mother.

Ⅱ.It be+玴.p.(said,reported,believed,thought,proved,known,hoped,suggested,etc.)+that-clause.

(=People say/report/believe/think…that-clause.)

Step Ⅷ Record after Teaching

unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生用）(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)

篇1：unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生用）(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)

篇2：unit 11 全单元课件word版（教师用）(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)

篇3：人教版高三unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生教师用）

篇4：Unit 20 全单元教案(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)

篇5：高二11单元教案(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇6：Unit 11 单元学习导航(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇7：Unit 12 Education 全单元教案(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)

篇8：Unit 11 Key to success 全单元简案(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)

篇9：unit 11 reading(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇10：高二英语Unit 18(全)(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇11：高二英语Unit 17(全)(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇12：高二英语Unit 16(全)(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇13：Unit 11 全单元教案(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

篇14：unit 16 Scientists at work全单元(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)

篇15：NSEFC2B Unit 16 全单元教案1(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇16：NSEFC2B Unit 14 全单元教案4(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇17：NSEFC2B Unit 20 全单元教案1(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇18：NSEFC2B Unit 20 全单元教案3(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

热门教案

学诗词

学名句

unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生用）(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)

篇1：unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生用）(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)

篇2：unit 11 全单元课件word版（教师用）(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)

篇3：人教版 高三unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生教师用）

篇4：Unit 20 全单元教案(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)

篇5：高二11单元教案(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇6：Unit 11 单元学习导航(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇7：Unit 12 Education 全单元教案(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)

篇8：Unit 11 Key to success 全单元简案(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)

篇9：unit 11 reading(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇10：高二英语Unit 18(全)(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇11：高二英语Unit 17(全)(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇12：高二英语Unit 16(全)(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇13：Unit 11 全单元教案(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

篇14：unit 16 Scientists at work全单元(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)

篇15：NSEFC2B Unit 16 全单元教案1(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇16：NSEFC2B Unit 14 全单元教案4(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇17：NSEFC2B Unit 20 全单元教案1(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

篇18：NSEFC2B Unit 20 全单元教案3(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)

热门教案

学诗词

学名句

篇3：人教版高三unit 11 全单元课件word版（学生教师用）